CHEMICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY "................................................................"

"Technical Information"
TECHNICAL AND VOCATIONAL EDUCATION
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY
(11TV)
* Center:
"................................................................"
* Country: "................................................................"
* Date:
* Issue:
"................................................................"
"................................................................"
Quality Certificates:
Worlddidac
Member
ISO 9000: Quality Management
(for Design, Manufacturing,
Commercialization and After-sales service)
European Union Certificate
(total safety)
Certificates ISO 14000 and
ECO-Management and Audit Scheme
(environmental management)
Worlddidac Quality Charter
Certificate
(Worlddidac Member)
Technical and Vocational Education Chemical Engineering Laboratory
(11TV)
Index
- Classroom and Laboratory Lay Out (Example).
- List of modules and teaching units included plus summarised catalogues
(included in priority 1 + 2 + 3).
Ref.:11TV-pre(01/11)
Classroom and Laboratory Lay Out
TECHNICAL AND VOCATIONAL EDUCATION
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY
(Example of Priority 1)
(11TV)
32 cm
INT
SBANC
Unit
LFFC
SSPC
INT
Unit
INT
Unit
QEDC
TFUC
Unit
INT
INT
Unit
OTHER TEACHING
AND
NON TEACHING UNITS
INT
LOCAL NET
WITH SCADA-NET
SYSTEM
TEACHER
DESK
90x60
1,4 cm
COMPUTER
CONTROLLED
UNITS
UDCC
Unit
ROOM 3
1,6 cm
INT
QRC
INT
Unit
CAGC
Unit
INT
UELLC
Unit
1,5 cm
Web-cam
Computer for each Teaching Unit
Teacher and Student Desk with
computers
Table for Teaching Unit
INT
UESLC
Unit
INT
EPAC
INT
Unit
EDPAC
INT
Unit
QDTLC
Unit
INT
QDTGC
INT
Unit
QCCC
Unit
INT
CAPC
Unit
INT
OTHER TEACHING
AND
NON TEACHING UNITS
25 cm
Unit
Teaching Unit
INT
Electronic
Interface
90x40
Cupboard
150x80 cm
48x35 cm
EDIBON ESN SCADA-NET
90x60 cm
80x30
Table office
Shelves
Table
E: 1:100
9 cm
Unit
EDIBON
ESN
SCADA-NET
STOCK
90x60
EFLPC
INT
Unit
Unit
QMS
QALFC
Unit
INT
ESED
Unit
EII
QRCC
Unit
INT
Unit
Unit
EEC
90x60
PROJECTOR
QRQC
150x80
150x80
150x80
90x40
90x40
90x40
ROOM 2
MAIN
ELECTRICAL
CABINET
90x60
EMERGENCY DOOR
ROOM 1
MAIN
WATER
CABINET
90x60
2,7 cm
90x40
150x80
06x051
MAIN
AIR
PANEL
90x60
90x40
TOILET
100x40
ELECTRONIC
BLACKBOARD
SERVICES
MANAGER
ROOM
90x60
TOILET
INT
Unit
90x40
150x80
Unit
EMLS
SEMINARY
QUCC
EXPANSIONS SPACE
STAND ALONG
AND
DANGEROUS
UNITS
STUDENT
TOILET
90x40
3,3 cm
Technical and Vocational Education Chemical Engineering Laboratory
(11TV)
List of modules and teaching units included plus
Summarised Catalogues
Priority 1
1100. Chemical Engineering
1110/20S:Chemical Engineering Basic Module (20 CAI + CAL)
1110/PLC: PLC's Module
1111/20S: Chemical Engineering Medium Module (20 CAI + CAL)
1111/PLC: PLC's Module
1112/20S: Chemical Engineering Advanced Module (20 CAI + CAL)
1112/PLC: PLC's Module
1120: Chemical Process Basic Module
1120/PLC: PLC's Module
1121: Chemical Process Medium Module
1121/PLC: PLC's Module
1100/ESN: EDIBON Scada-Net for Chemical Engineering
Ref.:11TV-pre(01/11)
issue:01/11
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING. BASIC MODULE (20 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 1110/20S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
UDCC
UDCC.Unit
UDCC/CIB
DAB
UDCC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
CONTINUOUS DISTILLATION UNIT, COMPUTER
CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
CONTINUOUS DISTILLATION UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR CONTINUOUS
DISTILLATION UNIT.
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR CONTINUOUS
DISTILLATION UNIT.
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
UDCC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
CONTINUOUS DISTILLATION UNIT (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
3
UDCC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
CONTINUOUS DISTILLATION UNIT
20
4
QRC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED CHEMICAL REACTORS
TRAINER, FORMED BY:
SERVICE UNIT COMPUTER CONTROLLED
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITON + DATA
MANAGEMENT FOR CHEMICAL REACTORS TRAINER
CONTINUOUS STIRRED TANK REACTOR
TUBULAR FLOW REACTOR
BATH REACTOR
STIRRED TANK REACTOR IN SERIES
LAMINAR FLOW REACTOR
PLUG FLOW REACTOR
1
QUSC
DAB
QRC/CCSOF
QRCAC
QRTC
QRDC
QRSC
QRLC
QRPC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
QRC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
CHEMICAL REACTORS TRAINING (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
6
QRC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
CHEMICAL REACTORS TRAINER
20
7
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
8
1110PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
9
1110PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
10
1110IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
11
1110CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
12
1110TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
13
1110MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 1110/20S
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 20 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
11.110 Chemical Engineering (Basic)
(continuation)
UDCC. Computer Controlled Continuous Distillation Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1 Unit: UDCC. Continuous Distillation Unit
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
1 UDCC. Unit:
Items supplied as standard
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel. Sieve Plates Column with 8 plates with
temperature taking and sample in every plate. 50 mm. internal dia. and 1000 mm length. Vacuumed,
silver-plated and double transparent band for vision. Column head with temperature taking and conical
output for distilled product. Head column with a valve for the steam distribution. Temperature
measurement system. Pump. Adjustable vacuum pump. 2 l. Boiler with heating mantle.2l. Distillation
collector. Balls refrigerator. Liebig-west coolant. Feed vessel, 10 l. capacity. 16 Temperature sensors.
Flow sensor. Differential pressure sensor. Solenoid valve, computer controlled.
Optional Columns: ( other 5 different columns available).
2 UDCC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer
controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration
of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can
be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences.
Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control
interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog
inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 UDCC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data.
Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the
graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= Unit: 900x600x2800 mm. Weight: 200 Kg. Control Interface: 490 x 450 x 470 mm.
Weight: 20 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/
chemicalengineeringbasic/UDCC.pdf
1 .- Dosing pump calibration.
2 .- Temperature sensors
calibration.
3 .- Flow sensor calibration.
4 .- Pressure sensor calibration.
5 .- Preparation of solutions.
6 .- A n a l y t i c v a l u a t i o n
techniques.
7 .- Filling of the column.
8 .- Batch operation.
9 .- O b t a i n i n g t h e
M c C a b e -T h i e l e
diagram. Without
reflux.
10.-Obtaining the number
of plates. Without reflux.
11.-Efficiency calculations.
Without reflux.
12.-V a r i a t i o n o f t h e
composition of the
distilled product:
constant reflux ratio.
13.-Constant composition
of the distilled product:
variation of reflux ratio.
14.-Constant composition
of the distilled product:
constant reflux ratio.
15.-Continuos feeding of the
column.
16.-M a s s a n d e n e r g y
balances across the
system.
17.- Plates fluid dynamics
studies, i n c l u d i n g l o a d
loss and column
abnegation.
18.- S t u d y o f t h e f e e d
temperature effect on
the continuos processes.
19.- C a l c u l a t i o n o f t h e
theoretical number of
floors in the plates
columns, and the
equivalent height of the
theoretical floor (HEPT) in
the Rasching rings columns.
20.- Pursuit of the temperatures
in all plates in the column
(Plates columns).
21.- Study of the rectification
efficiency at different
pressures.
22.- Effect of feed pre-heat.
23.- Effect of feed position.
24.- D e m o n s t r a t i o n o f
azeotropic distillation.
25.- Work different heating
contribution with regulation by the computer.
26.- S t u d i e s o f h e a t i n g
interchange in glass
refrigerators.
27-45.- Practices with PLC.
UDDC. Computer Controlled Discontinuous Distillation Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1 Unit: UDDC. Batch Distillation Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
UDDC. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel. Sieve Plates Column with 8 plates with one
temperature taking and sample, 50 mm. internal diameter and 1000 mm length. Vacuumed, silverplated and double transparent band for vision. Column head with temperature taking and conical output
for distilled product. Head column with a valve for the steam distribution.2 l. Boiler (with sample outputs)
with heating mantle. Boiler temperature (heater resistance) computer controlled. 2l. Distillation collector
of graduated glass. Refrigerator. Temperature measurement system. 7 Temperature sensors (”J” type).
Flow sensor. Differential pressure sensor. Working temperature: Ambient temperature up to 125°C.
Solenoid valve, computer controlled.
Optional Columns: ( other 5 different columns available).
2 UDDC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer
controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration
of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can
be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences.
Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control
interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 UDDC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data.
Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the
graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)=Unit: 900x500x2800 mm. Weight: 170 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/
chemicalengineeringbasic/UDDC.pdf
Page 13
Non computer controlled version available.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Preparation of solutions.
2.- A n a l y t i c v a l u a t i o n
techniques.
3.- Filling of the column.
4.- Batch operation.
5.- Obtaining the McCabe
Thiele diagram. Without
reflux.
6.- Obtaining the number
of plates. Without reflux.
7.- Efficiency calculations.
Without reflux.
8.- V a r i a t i o n o f t h e
composition of the
distilled product: constant
reflux ratio.
9.- Constant composition of
the distilled product:
variation of reflux ratio.
10.- Constant composition of
the distilled product:
constant reflux ratio.
11.- Mass and energy balances
across the system.
12.- Plates fluid dynamics
studies, including load loss
and column abnegation.
13.- Calculation of the theoretical
number of floors in the plates
columns, and the equivalent
height of the theoretical floor
(HEPT) in the Rasching rings
columns.
14.- Pursuit of the temperatures in
all plates in the column
(Plates columns).
15.- Study of the rectification
efficiency.
16.- Demonstration of azeotropic
distillation.
17.- Work different heating
contribution with regulation by
the computer.
18.- Studies of heating interchange
in glass refrigerators.
19.- Te m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r s
calibration.
20.- Flow sensor calibration.
21.- Pressure sensor calibration.
22-40.- Practices with PLC.
www.edibon.com
11.Chemical Engineering
2
Control
Interface Box
11.3- Chemical Reactors
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=chemicalengineering&subarea=reactors&lang=en
QRC. Computer Controlled Chemical Reactors Trainer:
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
1
QUSC.
Service Unit
QRCAC. Continuous Stirred
Tank Reactor ( )
3.2
6 Manuals
PID CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Available Chemical Reactors to be used with
Service Unit (QUSC) and SCADA System
4
3.1
QRTC. Tubular Flow
Reactor (
3.3
)
QRDC. Batch Reactor
( )
Other available Chemical Reactors
3.4
NE
W
to be used with the Unit (QUSC) and SCADA system:
- QRLC. Laminar Flow Reactor
11.Chemical Engineering
- QRPC. Plug Flow Reactor
NE
W
QRCC. Computer Controlled Catalytic Reactors
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Acquisition
Board
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
6 Manuals
PID CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
1
( )
Computer Control
Software for each
Chemical Reactor
Unit: QRCC. Catalytic Reactors
Non computer controlled version available too.
www.edibon.com
Optional accessory:
QRCC-IF. Flow Injection
Analysis (FIA) unit
Page 72
QRSC. Stirred Tank Reactors in Series
( )
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 1110/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
UDCC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR CONTINUOUS
DISTILLATION UNIT
1
1
2
PLC-PI
QRC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR CHEMICAL REACTORS
TRAINER
1
1
3
1110PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
4
1110PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
5
1110IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
6
1110CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
7
1110TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
8
1110MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING. MEDIUM MODULE (20 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 1111/20S
ITEM
1
1 / 3
REFERENCE
CAGC
CAGC.Unit
CAGC/CIB
DAB
CAGC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
GAS ABSORPTION COLUMN, COMPUTER CONTROLLED.
FORMED BY:
GAS ABSORPTION COLUMN
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR GAS ABSORPTION
COLUMN.
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR GAS ABSORPTION
COLUMN.
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
CAGC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR GAS
ABSORPTION COLUMN (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
20
3
CAGC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF GAS
ABSORPTION COLUMN
20
4
UELLC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED LIQUID-LIQUID
EXTRACTION UNIT, FORMED BY:
LIQUID-LIQUID EXTRACTION UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FORLIQUID-LIQUID
EXTRACTION UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT FOR LIQUID-LIQUID EXTRACTION
UNIT.
1
UELLC.Unit
UELLC/CIB
DAB
UELLC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
5
UELLC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR LIQUIDLIQUID EXTRACTION UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
20
6
UELLC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
LIQUID-LIQUID EXTRACTION UNIT
20
7
UESLC
SOLID-LIQUID EXTRACTION UNIT, COMPUTER
CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
SOLID-LIQUID EXTRACTION UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR SOLID-LIQUID
EXTRACTION EQUIPMENT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR SOLID-LIQUID
EXTRACTION UNIT
1
UESLC.Unit
UESLC/CIB
DAB
UESLC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
8
UESLC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR SOLIDLIQUID EXTRACTION EQUIPMENT (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
9
UESLC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
SOLID-LIQUID EXTRACTION UNIT
20
10
EPAC
RISING FILM EVAPORATOR COMPUTER
CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
1
11
EPAC.Unit
EPAC/CIB
RISING FILM EVAPORATOR
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR RISING FILM
EVAPORATOR COMPUTER CONTROLLED
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
1
1
DAB
1
Ref: 1111/20S
ITEM
2 / 3
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
11
EPAC/CCSOF
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR RISING FILM
EVAPORATOR
1
12
EPAC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR RISING
FILM EVAPORATOR (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
20
13
EPAC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
RISING FILM EVAPORATOR
20
14
EPDC
FALLING FILM EVAPORATOR , COMPUTER
CONTROLLED (accesory to EPAC), FORMED BY:
1
15
TGV
STEAM GENERATOR (3KW)
1
16
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
17
1111PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
18
1111PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
19
1111IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
20
1111CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
21
1111TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
22
1111MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 1111/20S
3 / 3
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 20 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
11.1- Chemical Engineering (Basic)
CAGC. Computer Controlled Gas Absorption Column
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
11.Chemical Engineering
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1
Unit: CAGC. Gas Absorption Column
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
CAGC. Unit:
The gas absorption column(CAGC) is an unit designed for studying hydrodynamics and absorption processes in packed
columns. The installation absorbs CO2 from an air mixture into a aqueous solution flowing down the column.
This unit is mounted on an anodized aluminium structure, with wheels for mobility. Main metallic elements in stainless steel.
Packed column consists of a glass cylindrical column of 1400 mm of height and 75 mm of internal dia., filled with Raschin rings
of 8mm dia.. Liquid circuit (water) and gas circuit (air and Co2). The liquid, that is stored in a PVC glass tank (40 litres capacity),
is impelled towards the column with the help of a centrifugal pump (maximum flow rate: 540 l./h. ).The water flow that arrives in
each moment to the column is measured with a flow sensor. Water flow is controlled by PID control. The liquid feeds to the
column through its upper end via one glass diffusion shower that assures an uniform distribution in the filler. After crossing the
column, the liquid effluent is returned to the storage tank through a PVC conduit with hydraulic
seal in which there are a control
flow valve and one sampler. Compressor (blower) provides a maximum flow of 6 m3/h and a maximum pressure of
1bar. The gas (CO2 or ammonia) is supplied by a cylinder, type bottle. (Not supplied with the unit).
The both gas flows are measured by sensors. Differential pressure sensors. This pressure can be measured in two different parts,
Mixing system of 2 gases streams. A measuring of CO2 equipment formed by:
A glass syringe of 100 ml capacity. Two glass tanks located at different heights and interconnected. They contain an aqueous
solution of KOH, in which the contained CO2 will be absorbed in the sample of gas to analyze.
3 way-valves to direct the gaseous currents during the analysis process. Connection elements.
2 CAGC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled.
Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors i n v o l v e d i n t h e
process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and
filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the
PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 CAGC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity
up to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= Unit: 1000x740x2600 mm. Weight : 100 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of the basic principles of the
absorption of a gas into a liquid
using a packed column.
2.- Gas stream analysis.
3.- Control system: Flow sensor
Calibration.
4.- Control system : Determination of
the adjustment parameters of a PID
controller.
5.- S t u d y o f t h e h y d r o d y n a m i c
characteristics of a packed column.
6.- Study of the hysteresis in the water
flow sensor.
7.- Determination of the drag and
flooding flows.
8.- Determination of the mass transfer
coefficient.
9.- Checking of the mass balances.
10.-Demonstration of methods of gas
and liquid quantitative analysis.
11.-Investigations of the variables
influencing the effectiveness of the
absorption.
Other possible practices:
12.-Determination of the air flow.
13.-Head loss in the column.
14-32.- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/
chemicalengineeringbasic/CAGC.pdf
UELLC. Computer Controlled Liquid-Liquid Extraction Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Software for:
Data
Acquisition - Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
Board
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1 Unit: UELLC. Liquid-Liquid Extraction Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
UELLC. Unit:
The UELLC is an unit, at laboratory scale, designed for studying the separation of liquid mixtures by contact with a solvent.
Anodized aluminium structure. Main metallic elements in stainless steel. Transparent elements for a better observation of the
process. Diagram in the front panel.
Jacketed glass packed column (longitude: 1200 mm and internal dia.:50 mm), in this column the extraction process is
carried out. Glass packed column of 500 mm of longitude and 25 mm of internal dia, packed with 3 mm glass Rasching rings,
this column is used to the distillation process. Boiler of 5 l for the distillation, heated by an adjustable electric blanket, with
automatic control of the temperature. 2 tanks of 30 l for the supply and the refined product, with independent casting valves.
3 glass tanks of 10 l of for the solvent, the extract and the solute. Dosing pump with PVC head. Dosing pump with stainless
steel head. Sensors: 5 of level, 2 of temperature and flow sensors. Pressure switches.7 Sample takings. Solenoid valves.
2 UELLC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time
curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to
avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters,
at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of parameters
involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, other electronic in control interface and, the third one in the
control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 UELLC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity
up to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)=Unit:1400x700x1800 mm. Weight: 90 Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/
chemicalengineeringbasic/UELLC.pdf
Page 12
Non computer controlled version available.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Pumps calibration.
2.- Performance in continuous or
discontinuous.
3.- Acid-bases valuation.
4.- Obtaining of the binodal curve.
5.- Material balances.
6.- Flooding velocity calculation.
7.- Height interphase regulation.
8.- Determination of the critical point
existence.
9.- Volumetric coefficient of material
transfer.
10.- Work in discontinuous regarding the
solvent.
11.- Work in discontinuous regarding the
supply.
12.- Study of the extraction process for
industrial processes.
13.- Analysis of the hydrodynamic liquidliquid system.
14.- Effect of the temperature in the
liquid-liquid extraction process.
15.- Studies of efficiency of the
extraction.
16- Solvent recovery effectiveness
calculation.
17.- Distillation process control study.
18.- Use of other combinations.
Other possible practices:
19.- Sensors calibration.
20-38.- Practices with PLC.
11.2- Chemical Engineering (General)
11
UESLC. Computer Controlled Solid-Liquid Extraction Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
11.Chemical Engineering
Control
Interface Box
Data
Acquisition
Board
5 Cables and Accessories
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1 Unit: UESLC. Solid-Liquid Extraction Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
UESLC. Unit:
This unit is a laboratory-scale equipment, designed for studing the separation of a soluble fraction from a solid with the help
of a solvent in a continuous multistage and countercurrent way. The design of the unit is based on the extraction cell used in
industrial scale, which is called “Rotocel”. Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution
that the elements in the real unit. Feed liquid vessel. Product liquid vessel. Feed hopper with feed endless screw for solids.
Motor for feed endless screw. Main rotary extraction vessel with 8 cells of extraction. Motor for the rotation of the main
extraction vessel. Variable rotation speed. 3 Sprinklers. Solid product container. Conductivity meter. 4 Conductivity sensors. 4
Temperature sensors. 3 Heating resistances. 3 Safety thermostats. 3 Peristaltic pumps (12.7 l/h). Circulation valves. Solvent
temperatures: ambient to 50ºC individually controlled.
2 UESLC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time
curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to
avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 UESLC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= Unit: 705 x 570 x 1680 mm. Weight : 120 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/
chemicalengineeringgeneral/UESLC.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Demonstration of the operation of a
continuous multiple stage process.
2.- Closed circuit percolation extraction
(batch reaction).
3.- Open loop percolation e x t r a c t i o n
(continuous operation).
4.- Investigation of one, two and three
stage continuous processes.
5.- Investigation into effect of solvent
temperatures.
6.- Investigation into effect of solvent
flow rates.
7.- Investigation into effect of processing
time.
8.- Process economics. Process efficiency.
9.- Mass balances.
10.- Influence of the particle size.
11.- Influence of the stages numbers.
12.- Influence of the solvent type.
13.- Extractions of inorganic and
aqueous components.
14.-Test of extractions for industrial use.
15.- Sensors calibration.
16-34.- Practices with PLC.
EPAC. Computer Controlled Rising Film Evaporator
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1 Unit: EPAC. Rising Film Evaporator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
EPAC. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Evaporation column with a heating surface of 0.122m3, 30mm of internal dia. 60 mm of external dia. and 1300 mm of
length. Membrane dosing pump, max. flow 15l/h, with flow control. Single effect vacuum pump, computer controlled, max.
flow 3m3/h and max. vacuum of 150 microns.3 Graduated tanks(10 l) (for feeding, concentrated and evaporated). 2
Graduated vessels (500 ml) for the storage of concentrated and evaporated product. 400 mm equivalent length serpentine
condenser. Heating resistance, computer controlled. High safety pressure cut out. Sensors: 10 of temperature, 1 of flow, 3 of
level and 2 of pressure. Solenoid valve, computer controlled.
OPTIONAL Accessory: (not included in the standard supply)
EPDC. Falling Film Column for adding to EPAC.
2 EPAC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 EPAC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= Unit: 2300x1000x805 mm. Weight : 100 Kg. Control Interface : 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/
chemicalengineeringgeneral/EPAC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 14
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Evaporation velocity calculation.
2.- Evaporation velocity study in
function of working conditions.
3.- Study of the relation of condensate
product with evaporate.
4.- Study of mass balance on solute.
5.- Study of mass balance on water.
6.- Energy balance on evaporation unit.
7.- Energy balance in the tubular
refrigerator.
8.- Calculation of global coefficient of
heat transfer.
9.- Calculation of CI coefficient for a
tubular refrigerator.
10.- Investigation of effect of varying
process parameters such as:
vacuum, flow rate, temperature,
recycle rate.
11.- Heat transfer measurements and
calculation.
12.- Heating efficiency determination.
13.- Efficiency determination of the
steam used in the process.
14.- S t e a m g e n e r a t o r e f f i c i e n c y
determination.
15.-Temperature sensors calibration.
16.- Level sensors calibration.
17.- Pressure sensors calibration.
18.- Feed pump calibration.
19-37.- Practices with PLC.
9.11- Nozzles & Steam
TFTC. Computer Controlled Nozzle Performance Test Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TFTC. Nozzle Performance Test Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TFTC. Unit:
This unit has been specially designed to allow students to investigate the performance of a nozzle,as a kinetic energy producer
and as a thrust producer.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Chamber
in stainless steel, diameter: 200 mm. approx. and height: 400 mm. approx. End cover secured by bolts and sealed by O ring.
Nozzles kit of 2 mm. of nominal
throat; One them convergent, 4 convergent-divergent with 1.2, 1.4, 1.6 and 2 ratio,
respectively. Divergence 10o (included). 2 Pressure sensors from 0-8 bar, to measure chamber inlet and outlet pressures. 1
Pressure sensor in the chamber. 2 Temperature sensors to measure chamber inlet and outlet temperatures.1 Temperature
sensors in the chamber. Flow sensor (air volume and pressure at the outlet of the chamber).Force sensor. Deviation valves to
direct air to the nozzle or to the chamber. Needle valve to precise adjustment. Back valve to control chamber pressure. Safety
valve to control the inlet pressure, air regulator and filter where the laboratory . Compressor will be connected. Operates at
ambient temperature-stabilises immediately.
2 TFTC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TFTC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 1000x700x600 mm. Weight: 60 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1
1.- Visual demonstration of the
phenomenon of "choking".
2.- Determination of jet reaction and
specific thrust at a variety of inlet and
back pressure.
3.- Determination of inlet pressure effect
on mass flow rate, for a given
counter-pressure.
4.- Comparison of actual mass flow rate
with the theoretical value.
5.- Determination of the counter
pressure effect on mass flow rate.
6.- Calculation of nozzle efficiencies.
7.- Determination of the jet velocity and
the nozzle efficiency.
8.- Determination of the jet reaction and
the specific pushing.
9.- Simple and classical method used to
determine jet velocity.
10.- Measurement of mass flow rate and
coefficient of discharge.
Other possible practices:
11.- Sensors calibration.
12-30 .- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
nozzlessteam/TFTC.pdf
TPT. Nozzle Pressure Distribution Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Nozzles: convergent type (conical), with 6 pressure tappings; convergentdivergent type, with 5 pressure tappings, for a design pressure ratio of
0.25; convergent- divergent, with 8 pressure tappings, for a design
pressure ratio of 0.1.
Nozzles can be changed quickly and easily.
2 Pressure meters (manometers), 100 mm. diameter, to measure air inlet
and outlet pressures (range: 0 to 10 bar). 8 Pressure meters (manometers),
60 mm. diameter, to determine the pressure at the nozzle tappings (range: 1 to 8 bar).
Variable area type flow meter to indicate air flow at standard conditions (p=
1.2Kg/m-3). (Correction factors for other pressures and temperatures are
provided). Range 0 to 9 g s-1.
2 Glass temperature meters, to indicate air temperature before and after
nozzle(range: 0 to 50ºC).
Valves to give a fine control of air inlet pressure and outlet pressure. Air filter
and pressure regulator to provide constant pressure, clean and water free
air to the unit.
It works at ambient temperature- stabilises immediately.
Gives students an opportunity to calibrate equipment.
Cables and accessories for normal operation.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.): 1000 x 590 x 890 mm. Weight: 50Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Visual demonstration of the
phenomenon of choking.
2.- Investigation of the relationship
between inlet pressure and the mass
flow rate.
3.- Demonstration of under expansion
and over expansion with recompression.
4.- Investigation of the relationship
between outlet pressure and mass
flow rate for a convergent nozzle.
5.- Investigation of the relationship
between outlet pressure and mass
flow rate for a convergent -divergent
nozzle.
6.- Investigation of the pressure
distribution in convergent and
convergent-divergent nozzles when
operating with several overall
pressure ratios.
7.- Calibration.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/nozzlessteam/TPT.pdf
TGV. Steam Generator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure and stainless steel metallic elements. Heat
resistant polycarbonate protection screens. Stainless steel water tank with
a water inlet, a water outlet and two steam outlets. Tank filling automatic
system. Temperature Sensor. Safety Level Switch. Safety Pressure Switch.
Electric Resistance: 3000 W.
Electronic Console, including: Main switch on the back part of the
console (magnetothermic). Temperature Controller. Resistance on/off
indicator. Water critical level indicator. Connectors “micro” for the
temperature sensor, the level switch and the pressure switch. Unit on/off
main switch.
Diagram in the front panel.
Dimensions of generator(approx.): 680 x 430 x 750 mm. Weight: 50Kg
Dimensions of console (approx.): 300 x 190 x 120 mm. Weight: 3Kg.
Other available version:
- TGV-6kW. Steam Generator, three-phase, 6 KW.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/nozzlessteam/TGV-TGV-6KW.pdf
Page 58
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 1111/PLC
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 2
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
CAGC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR GAS ABSORPTION
COLUMN
1
1
2
PLC-PI
UELLC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR LIQUID-LIQUID
EXTRACTION UNIT
1
1
3
PLC-PI
UESLC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR SOLID-LIQUID
EXTRACTION EQUIPMENT
1
1
4
PLC-PI
EPAC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR RISING FILM
EVAPORATOR
1
1
5
1111PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
1111PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
1111IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
8
1111CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
1111TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
1111MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
10
Ref: 1111/PLC
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING. ADVANCED MODULE (20 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 1112/20S
ITEM
1
1 / 4
REFERENCE
EDPAC
EDPAC.Unit
EDPAC/CIB
DAB
EDPAC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
DOUBLE EFFECT RISING FILM EVAPORATOR,
COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
DOUBLE EFFECT RISING FILM EVAPORATOR
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR DOUBLE EFFECT
RISING FILM EVAPORATOR
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR DOUBLE EFFECT
RISING FILM EVAPORATOR
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
EDPAC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR DOUBLE
EFFECT RISING FILM EVAPORATOR (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
3
EDPAC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
DOUBLE EFFECT RISING FILM EVAPORATOR
20
4
EDPDC
DOUBLE EFFECT FALLING FILM EVAPORATOR,
COMPUTER CONTROLLED. (accesory to EDPAC),
FORMED BY:
1
5
QDTLC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED LIQUID MASS TRANSFER
AND DIFFUSION COEFFICIENT UNIT, FORMED BY:
1
6
QDTLC.Unit
LIQUID MASS TRANSFER AND DIFFUSION
COEFFICIENT UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR LIQUID MASS
TRANSFER AND DIFFUSION COEFFICIENT UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR LIQUID MASS
TRANSFER AND DIFFUSION COEFFICIENT UNIT
1
QDTLC/CIB
DAB
QDTLC/CCSOF
1
1
1
7
QDTLC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR LIQUID
MASS TRANSFER AND DIFFUSION COEFFICIENT
UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
8
QDTLC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
LIQUID MASS TRANSFER AND DIFFUSION
COEFFICIENT UNIT
20
9
QDTGC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED GASEOUS MASS TRANSFER
AND DIFFUSION COEFFICIENT UNIT, FORMED BY:
GASEOUS MASS TRANSFER AND DIFFUSION
COEFFICIENT UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR GASEOUS MASS
TRANSFER AND DIFFUSION COEFFICIENT UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR GASEOUS MASS
TRANSFER AND DIFFUSION COEFFICIENT UNIT
1
QDTGC.Unit
QDTGC/CIB
DAB
QDTGC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
10
QDTGC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
GASEOUS MASS TRANSFER AND DIFFUSION
COEFFICIENT UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
20
11
QDTGC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
GASEOUS MASS TRANSFER AND DIFFUSION
COEFFICIENT UNIT
20
Ref: 1112/20S
ITEM
12
2 / 4
REFERENCE
QCCC
QCCC.Unit
QCCC/CIB
DAB
QCCC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
CRAKING COLUMN, COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED
BY:
CRAKING COLUMN
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR CRAKING COLUMN.
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR CRAKING COLUMN.
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
13
QCCC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
CRACKING COLUMN (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
20
14
QCCC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
CRAKING COLUMN
20
15
CAPC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED WETTED WALL GAS
ABSORTION COLUMN, FORMED BY:
WETTED WALL GAS ABSORTION COLUMN
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR WETTED WALL GAS
ABSORTION COLUMN
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION +DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR WETTED WALL GAS
ABSORTION COLUMN
1
CAPC.Unit
CAPC/CIB
DAB
CAPC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
16
CAPC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR WETTED
WALL GAS ABSORTION COLUMN (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
17
CAPC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
WETTED WALL GAS ABSORTION COLUMN
20
18
QUCC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED CRYSTALIZATION UNIT,
FORMED BY:
CRYSTALIZATION UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR CRYSTALIZATION
UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR CRYSTALIZATION UNIT
1
QUCC.Unit
QUCC/CIB
DAB
QUCC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
19
QUCC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
CRYSTALIZATION UNIT
20
20
QUCC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
CRYSTALIZATION UNIT
20
21
QRQC
CHEMICAL REACTORS TRAINING SYSTEM ,
COMPUTER CONTROLLED, FORMED BY:
BASE-SERVICE UNIT FOR CHEMICAL REACTORS
TRAINING SYSTEM
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR CHEMICAL REACTORS
TRAINING SYSTEM
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT FOR CHEMICAL REACTORS TRAINING
SYSTEM
ISOTHERMIC REACTOR WITH STIRRER
TUBULAR FLOW REACTOR
ADIABATIC AND ISOTHERMIC REACTOR
REACTORS WITH STIRRER IN SERIES
QRUBI
QRQC/CIB
DAB
QRQC/CCSOF
QRIA
QRFT
QRAD
QRSA
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ref: 1112/20S
ITEM
3 / 4
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
22
QRQC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
CHEMICAL REATORS TRAINING SYSTEM (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS) OF THE REACTORS:
ISOTHERMIC, TUBULAR FLOW, ADIABATIC AND
ISOTHERMIC AND WITH STIRRER IN SERIES
20
23
QRQC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
CHEMICAL REACTORS TRAINING SYSTEM
20
24
QRCC
CATALYTIC REACTORS, COMPUTER CONTROLLED,
FORMED BY:
CATALYTIC REACTORS.
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR CATALYTIC
REACTORS.
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR CATALYTIC REACTORS.
1
QRCC.Unit
QRCC/CIB
DAB
QRCC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
25
QRCC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
CATALYTIC REACTORS. (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
20
26
QRCC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
CATALYTIC REACTORS.
20
27
QRCC-IF
QALFC
FLOW INJECTION ANALYSIS (FIA) UNIT
COMPUTER CONTROLLED FIXED BED ADSORPTION
UNIT, FORMED BY:
FIXED BED ADSORPTION UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR FIXED BED
ADSORPTION UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR FIXED BED
ADSORPTION UNIT
1
1
QALFC.Unit
QALFC/CIB
DAB
QALFC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
28
QALFC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR FIXED
BED ADSORPTION UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
20
29
QALFC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
FIXED BED ADSORPTION UNIT
20
30
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
31
TGV/6KW
STEAM GENERATOR (6KW)
1
32
1112PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
33
1112PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
34
1112IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
35
1112CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
36
1112TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
37
1112MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 1112/20S
4 / 4
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 20 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
11.210 Chemical Engineering (General)
(continuation)
EDPAC. Computer Controlled Double Effect Rising Film Evaporator
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1 Unit: EDPAC. Double Effect Rising Film Evaporator
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
EDPAC. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
2 evaporation columns with a heating area of 0.122 m2, 30 mm inner dia., 60 mm outer dia. and length of 1300 mm.2
diaphragm dosing pumps, with max. flow of 15 l/h. with flow control (0.43 ml impuls). Simple effect vacuum pump with max.
Flow of 3 m3/h and max. vacuum of 150 microns. Five 10 litre tanks (feed, concentrated and evaporated). Four 500 ml
graduated vessel for collecting concentrated and evaporated product. 2 Coil coolants with length of 400 mm. 2 High safety
pressure cut out for pressure control in the columns. Sensors: 15 of temperature, 1 of flow, 2 of pressure and 5 of level. 200 W
immersion heater, computer controlled. Solenoid valves.
The unit allows to work with several configurations:
a) Columns receive steam from the generator in an independent way. b) Steam from the first column´s jacket can be used to
heat the second column.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORY: (not included in the standard supply)
-EDPDC. Double Effect Falling Film Column for adding to EDPAC.
2 EDPAC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time
curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to
avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 EDPAC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= Unit: 2300x1000x2300 mm. Weight :200 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/
chemicalengineeringgeneral/EDPAC.pdf
1.2.3.4.-
Heating efficiency calculation.
Sugared solution concentration.
Evaporation speed determination.
Study of the evaporation speed in
function of the working conditions.
5.- Study of the relation between
condensed and evaporated product.
6.- Study of mass balance in solute.
7.- Study of mass balance in solvent.
8.- Energy balance in the evaporation
unit.
9.- Energy balance in the tubular
refrigerator.
10.-Heat transfer global coefficient
determination.
11.-Coefficient determination for a
tubular refrigerator.
12.-Study of mass balance in solute in
one column.
13.-Fruit juices and vegetable extracts
concentration.
14.-Concentrated milk obtaining.
15.-Efficiency determination of the steam
used in the process.
16.-S t e a m g e n e r a t o r e f f i c i e n c y
determination.
17.-Investigation of effect of varying
process parameters such as: vacuum,
flow rate, temperature, recycle rate.
18.-Heat transfer measurements and
calculation.
19.-Temperature Sensors Calibration.
20.-Level Sensors Calibration.
21.-Pressure Sensors Calibration.
22.-Feed Pumps Calibration.
23-41.- Practices with PLC.
CAPC. Computer Controlled Wetted Wall Gas Absorption Column
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board - Data Acquisition
5 Cables and Accessories
- Data Management
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1 Unit: CAPC. Wetted Wall Gas Absorption Column
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
CAPC. Unit:
Unit used for demonstration and determination of liquid film mass transfer coefficients. Anodized aluminium structure.
Diagram in the front panel. Wetted wall column of glass, with water inlet and outlet sections,
height: 900 mm, internal dia.:32 mm. Feed pump of the absorption column. Air flow sensor. Water flow sensor.
Deoxygenating column of transparent acrylic material, height: 1570 mm, internal dia.: 25 mm. Deoxygenerator feed
pump. Oxygen meter. Air pump. Water tank, capacity 50 l. approx. Pumps control.
2 CAPC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time
curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to
avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 CAPC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= Unit: 1000x500x2500 mm. Weight :250 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/
chemicalengineeringgeneral/CAPC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 15
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Absorption process study.
2.- Calculation of liquid film mass
transfer coefficients.
3.- Variation of coefficient with mass
flow rate.
4.- Variation of oxygen flow rate to
determine power law relationship.
5.- The system chosen for the
experiment is the absorption of
oxygen into free water. In this system
the solubility and enthalpy of
solution are small and by saturating
the inlet air with water, humidification
effects are eliminated. Thus it is
possible to maintain reasonably the
isothermal conditions throughout the
column.
6.- These experiments allow a power
law relationship to be calculated.
7.- Effect of water flow rate.
8.- Effect of oxygen flow rate.
Other possible practices:
9.- Sensors calibration.
10-28.- Practices with PLC.
www.edibon.com
11.Chemical Engineering
2
Control
Interface Box
11.2- Chemical Engineering (General)
11
(continuation)
QDTLC. Computer Controlled Liquid Mass Transfer and Diffusion Coefficient Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
11.Chemical Engineering
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1
Unit: QDTLC. Liquid Mass Transfer and Diffusion
Coefficient Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
QDTLC. Unit:
This unit allows to students to familiarise with the notions of mass transfer theory, specially about the
diffusion in liquid systems, obtaining experimental data and results which are very useful for a correct practice understanding
of the process and consequently, for the technical teaching of the students.
The experimental determination of the diffusion coefficient DAB for a binary mixture, can be done.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Thermostatic bath. Liquid vessel. Magnetic stirrer and magnet. Heater resistance. Conductivity meter. Conductivity sensor.
Temperature sensor. Level switch. Diffusion cell, with special calculated capillaries for an accurate diffusion.
2 QDTLC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 QDTLC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 400 x 300 x 450 mm. Weight: 18 Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Fick´s law application to calculate
the diffusivity.
2.- Direct measurement of mass
transfer rates.
3.- Determination of molar density rate.
4.- Effect of concentration of diffusion
coefficients.
5.- Simple analysis of a first order
unsteady state process.
6.- Concentration and conductivity
relation.
7.- Study the effect of the temperature
on diffusion coefficients.
Other possible practices:
8.- Sensors calibration.
9-27.- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/
chemicalengineeringgeneral/QDTLC.pdf
QDTGC. Computer Controlled Gaseous Mass Transfer and Diffusion Coefficient Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
6 Manuals
1
Unit: QDTGC. Gaseous Mass Transfer
and Diffusion Coefficient Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
QDTGC. Unit:
This unit is a teaching unit that allows to students familiarise with the notions of mass transfer theory, specifically about
the diffusion of a volatile liquid into an inert gas, obtaining experimental data and results which are very useful for a correct
practice understanding of the process and, consequently, for the technical teaching of the students.
The experimental determination of the diffusion coefficient, DAB for a binary mixture, can be done.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. A
precision glass capillary tube. Air pump with regulation. Traveling optic system accurate focus adjustment and mounted for
vertical axis movement against a Vernier scale (Vernier range: 0-300mm). Thermostatically controlled water transparentsided Bath. (capacity: 36 l). Heater resistance: 500W. Temperature sensor. Level switch.
2 QDTGC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up
to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 QDTGC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= Unit: 600 x 570 x 500 mm . Weight: 25 Kg.
Control Interface : 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/
chemicalengineeringgeneral/QDTGC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 16
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Fick´s law application to calculate
the diffusivity.
2.- Direct measurement of mass transfer
rates.
3.- Determination of molar density
transfer rate.
4.- Study of the effect of temperature on
diffusion coefficients.
5.- Use of gas laws to calculate
concentration differences in terms of
partial pressures.
6.- Plot of concentration profiles.
Other possible practices:
7.- Sensors calibration.
8-26.- Practices with PLC.
11.210 Chemical Engineering (General)
(continuation)
QCCC. Computer Controlled Cracking Column
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
1
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
Unit: QCCC. Cracking Column.
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
QCCC Unit:
This unit is a complete lab tool that allows to the students to carry out a cracking reaction, and the
study and the control of different variables that condition it. Also, the production cycle will be completed, by means of a
separation, purification and analysis of the obtained products in that cracking reaction. This unit works controlled from a
computer (PC), which allows a register of temperature and pressure data and the control of the cracking and distillation
processes. The software is of easy and intuitive control.
Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and main metallic elements in stainless steel.
Glass elements made of “Pyrex” of high thermal and mechanical resistance, as well as a perfect
chemical inertia. 250 ml. reactor flask. Reactor´s cap, with 4 inlets. Distillation column type Villeoux.
Stirring rod with stirring lock , that assures a perfect insulation of the system. Graduated filling funnel. Triplex fastening pliers.
Glass- glass joints.
4 Temperature sensors, type “J”. 2 Pressure sensors. Pressure and temperature in tables placed in the main points of the
system. Maximum working temperature: 260 ºC.Heating blanket. Plastic elements of high thermal resistance. Vacuum
pump.
2 QCCC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time
curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to
avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 QCCC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit:1000 x470 x1070 mm. Weight: 75 Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/
chemicalengineeringgeneral/QCCC.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Carry out cracking reactions.
2.- Influence of temperature in the
Ricinoleic Acid cracking reaction
(gradual increment of temperature).
3.- Influence of temperature in the
Ricinoleic Acid cracking reaction
(sudden increment of temperature).
4.- Influence of pressure in the
Ricinoleic Acid pyrolysis reaction
(working pressure too low).
5.- Influence of pressure in the
Ricinoleic Acid pyrolysis reaction
(low working pressure).
6.- Work with different heating
gradients, regulated through the
computer.
7.- Pitch as a catalyst.
8.- Simple distillation. Separation in
its components of the product
mixture of cracking.
9.- Simple distillation. Heptanal
purification.
10.- Simple distillation. Undecylenic
acid purification.
11.- Choosing the mobile phase in thin
layer Chromatography.
12.- Application of samples on TLC
plates.
13.- Thin layer chromatography plates
analysis.
14.- Work with different pressures,
regulated through the computer.
Other possible practices:
15.- Sensors calibration.
16.- Cleaning the system.
17.-Monogram of pressure.
18-36.- Practices with PLC.
QUCC. Computer Controlled Crystallisation Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
EDIBON Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: QUCC. Crystallisation Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
QUCC. Unit:
This unit demonstrates an industrially important type of crystallisation, namely solution cooling crystallisation. It introduces
students to the fundamentals of crystallisation and understanding of this industrial technique.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel. Main metallic elements in stainless steel.
Jacketed crystallisation vessel with temperature control and agitation. The crystallisation reactor is thermally controlled by
means of heated water circulating in the reactor jacket. Water heater. Temperature sensor and water heater with PID control
for accurate process temperature control. Variable speed agitator. Cooling action controlled indirectly by the valved
flowmeter. Different cooling rates can be investigated by the application of different water flowrates. Water flowmeter. Heat
exchanger. Temperature sensors. Conductivity sensor for measuring solution conductivity. Set of sieves for crystal size
distribution determination. Protection devices for all electrical circuits. Batch operation. Available an accessory for continuous
operation.
2 QUCC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time
curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to
avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 QUCC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 1000x550x700 mm. Weight: 50 Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/
chemicalengineeringgeneral/QUCC.pdf
Page 17
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Understanding the principles of
crystallisation.
2.- Evaluation of crystallisation
efficiency and crystallisation kinetics.
3.- Mass balancing.
4.- Energy balancing.
5.- Crystall size distribution.
6.- Study of the effect of agitation rate.
7.- Study of the effect of cooling rate.
8.- Bath operation.
9.- Continuous operation (optional, if
Continuous Feed Accessory is
acquired).
Other possible practices:
10.-Sensor calibration.
11-29.- Practices with PLC.
www.edibon.com
11.Chemical Engineering
Control
Interface Box
11.3- Chemical Reactors
11
QRQC. Computer Controlled Chemical Reactors Training System:
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
1 QRUBI. Base Service Unit
Control
Interface Box
11.Chemical Engineering
5 Cables and Accessories
3
( )
Data
Acquisition
Board
Computer Control
Sotfware for each
Chemical Reactor
6 Manuals
4 Chemical Reactors available to be used with the Base Service Unit:
4.1
QRIA. Isothermal Reactor
with Stirrer ( )
4.2
QRIA/D. Isothermal
Reactor with Distillation (
)
4.3
QRFT. Tubular
Flow Reactor (
)
4.4
QRAD. Adiabatic
and Isothermal Reactor (
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
1
2
3
4
Common items for Chemical Reactors type “QR”:
QRQC Unit:
This unit is common for Chemical Reactors type “QR” and can work with one or
several reactors. It supplies all the services for the operation of each reactor.
2 dosing pumps. 3 tanks of 10 l.: two for the reagents and the other for
the products. 2 flow meters for liquids, flow range : 0.7-7 and 0.54-5.4 l/h.
Flow meter for gas, max. flow of 1440N l/h and max. pressure of 0.5 Kg cm-2O.
Thermostatic
bath of 9 l. that regulates the temperature between Tenvironment+ 5
and 200OC. Level switch. A magnetic-creep pump to impeller the water that
comes from the thermostatic bath and goes to the reactor module.Temperature
sensor to get the temperature of the reactor in a continuos way. Control system
of the reaction. Conductivity cell and conductimeter, connected to the control
interface. Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 1100x1000x980 mm. Weight: 75 Kg.
QRQC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for Chemical Reactors type “QR” and can work with one or
several reactors. It has a process diagram in the front panel. The unit control
elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in
the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors
involved in the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’
values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of
modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at any moment
during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a
real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels:one mechanical
in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control
software. Dimensions (approx.): 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board . 16 Analog inputs. Sampling
rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs / Outputs.
Chemical Reactors available to be used with the Base Service Unit:
QRIA. Isothermal Reactor with Stirrer:
Reactor insulated made of Pyrex-glass, with a max. volume of 2 l.
Agitation system with speed control and indication from 0 to 2000 rpm.
Temperature sensor. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control Software for Isothermal Reactor with Stirrer (QRIA):
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,
comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000
data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the
graphic representation in real time.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 750x500x700mm. Weight: 50 Kg.
4.2
QRIA/D. Isothermal Reactor with Distillation:
Reactor insulated made of Pyrex-glass, with a max. volume of 2l.
Agitation system with speed control and indication from 0 to 2000 rpm.
Distillation column. Balls coolant. Coil coolant. Vacuum pump and tramp.
Funnel. Temperature sensors. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals manuals.
Computer Control Software for Isothermal Reactor with Distillation
(QRIA/D).(#)
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 750x500x700 mm. Weight: 70 Kg.
4.3 QRFT. Tubular Flow Reactor:
Temperature controlled by a jacket of water, through a temperature
sensor. Electrical preheater of 265 W for both feeding lines. Reactor with
inner coil made of teflon of 6mm of interior dia., length 14.5 m, volume:
0.393 l. Temperature sensor, that controls the preheating temperature. This
unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control Software for Tubular Flow Reactor (QRFT).(#)
Dimensions (approx.) =700x500x500 mm. Weight: 75 Kg.
4.4
QRAD. Adiabatic and Isothermal Reactor:
Reactor insulated made of Pyrex-glass, with a max. volume of 2l.
Nickel-plated cooper coil of 2500mm long, outer dia. of 6.7mm and inner
one of 4.1 mm. Stirrer. Water flow control of 0-6 l/min. Outer jacket made of
anodised aluminium and inner jacket made of expanded polyurethane foam
rubber. 3 Temperature sensors. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control Software for Adiabatic and Isothermal Reactor
(QRAD).(#).
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 1000x600x400 mm. Weight: 100 Kg.
4.5
QRSA. Reactors with Stirrer in Series:
3 Reactors insulated made of Pyrex-glass, with a max. volume of 1 l. Each
one. Agitation system with speed control and indication from 0 to 2000 rpm.
3 Temperature sensors.This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control Software for Reactors with Stirrer in Series (QRSA). (#)
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 1000x1000x1000 mm. Weight: 100 Kg.
4.1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
chemicalengineering/reactors/QRQC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
)
4.5
QRSA. Reactors with
Stirrer in Series ( )
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Isothermal Reactor with Stirrer (QRIA):
1.- Calibration of the temperature
sensors.
2.- Calibration of the conductivity cell.
3.- D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f t h e i o n i c
conductivities.
4.- Discontinuous operation. Obtaining
of the reaction order respect to ethylacetate.Initial velocity method.
5.- Discontinuous operation. Obtaining
of the reaction order respect to sodium
hydroxide. Initial velocity method.
6.- Discontinuous operation. Velocity
Constant Computation. Constant
sodium hydroxide initial
concentration.
7.- Discontinuous Operation. Velocity
Constant Computation. Constant
ethyl-acetate initial concentration.
8.- Velocity equation formulation.
9.- Discontinuous Operation. Variation of
the kinetic constant with temperature.
Arrhenius Equation.
10.- Discontinuous Operation. Theoretical
and experimental conversion
comparative. Deviation from ideality.
11.- Discontinuous Operation. Mixture
effects.
12.- Continuous Operation.
13.- Continuous Operation. Mixture
effects.
14.-Measurement conductivity system:
conductimeter.
15-33.- Practices with PLC.
Isothermal Reactor with Distillation
(QRIA/D):
34.-Calibration of the temperature
sensors.
35.- Calibration of the conductivity cell.
36.- Determination of the ionic conductivities.
37.-Discontinuous operation. Obtaining of
the reaction order respect to ethylacetate.Initial velocity method.
38.-Discontinuous operation. Obtaining of
the reaction order respect to sodium
hydroxide. Initial velocity method.
39.-Discontinuous operation. Velocity
Constant Computation. Constant
sodium hydroxide initial
concentration.
40.-Discontinuous Operation. Velocity
Constant Computation. Constant
ethyl-acetate initial concentration.
41.- Velocity equation formulation.
42.- Discontinuous Operation. Variation of
the kinetic constant with temperature.
Arrhenius Equation.
43.- Discontinuous Operation. Theoretical
and experimental conversion
comparative. Deviation from ideality.
44.- Discontinuous Operation. Mixture
effects.
45.- Continuous Operation.
46.- Continuous Operation. Mixture
effects.
47.-Measurement conductivity system:
conductimeter.
48.-Study of the reactive distillation.
49.-Study of alcohols condensation.
50.-Study of the organic anhydrides.
51.-Synthesis of esters.
52-70.- Practices with PLC.
Page 18
Tubular Flow Reactor (QRFT):
71.- Calibration of the temperature
sensors.
72.- Analysis of reagents and products.
73.- Ionic conductivities determination.
74.- Theoretical conversion of the
tubular reactor.
75.- Experimental determination of the
conversion of the tubular reactor.
76.- Dependence in the residence time.
77.- Determination of the reaction order.
78.- Dependence of the speed constant
and the conversion with the
temperature.
79.- Measurement conductivity system:
conductimeter.
80.- Complete emptying of the unit.
81-99.- Practices with PLC.
Adiabatic and Isothermal Reactor
(QRAD):
100.-Calibration of the temperature
Sensors.
101.-Calibration of the flow sensor.
102.-Calibration of the conductivity
sensor.
103.-Determination of the ionic
conductivities.
104.-Discontinuous work. Calculation
of the order of the reaction
referred to the ethyl-acetate. Initial
velocity method.
105.-Discontinuous operation.
Determination of the order of the
reaction referred to t h e s o d i u m
hydroxide. Initial velocity method.
106.-Discontinuous operation.
Determination of the speed
constant, the initial concentration of
the sodium hydroxide is constant.
107.-Discontinuous operation.
Determination of the speed constant,
the initial concentration of the ethyl
acetate is constant.
108.-Formulation of the speed equation.
109.-Discontinuous operation. Variation
of the kinetic constant when the
temperature is not constant:
Arrhenius equation.
110.-Discontinuous operation.
Comparison of the theoretical and
the experimental conversion:
Deviation from the ideality.
111.-Calculation of the heat transference
coefficient of the coil.
112.-Calculation of the hydrolysis
reaction enthalpy.
113.-Discontinuous operation. Mixture
effects.
114.-Continuous operation.
115.-Measurement conductivity system:
conductimeter.
116-134.- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Reactors
with Stirrer in Series (QRSA):
135.-Calibration of the temperature
sensors.
136.-Calibration of the conductivity cell.
137.-Determination of the ionic
conductivities.
138.-Work with just one reactor in
continuous.
139.-Work with just one reactor in
continuous with mixture effects.
140.-Work with 3 reactors in continuous.
141-159.- Practices with PLC.
11.3- Chemical Reactors
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=chemicalengineering&subarea=reactors&lang=en
QRC. Computer Controlled Chemical Reactors Trainer:
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
1
QUSC.
Service Unit
QRCAC. Continuous Stirred
Tank Reactor ( )
3.2
6 Manuals
PID CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Available Chemical Reactors to be used with
Service Unit (QUSC) and SCADA System
4
3.1
QRTC. Tubular Flow
Reactor (
3.3
)
QRDC. Batch Reactor
( )
Other available Chemical Reactors
3.4
NE
W
to be used with the Unit (QUSC) and SCADA system:
- QRLC. Laminar Flow Reactor
11.Chemical Engineering
- QRPC. Plug Flow Reactor
NE
W
QRCC. Computer Controlled Catalytic Reactors
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Acquisition
Board
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
6 Manuals
PID CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
1
( )
Computer Control
Software for each
Chemical Reactor
Unit: QRCC. Catalytic Reactors
Non computer controlled version available too.
www.edibon.com
Optional accessory:
QRCC-IF. Flow Injection
Analysis (FIA) unit
Page 72
QRSC. Stirred Tank Reactors in Series
( )
issue:01/11
PLC's MODULE
Ref: 1112/PLC
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 2
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
EDPAC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR FOR DOUBLE EFFECT
RISING FILM EVAPORATOR
1
1
2
PLC-PI
QDTLC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR LIQUID MASS
TRANSFER AND DIFFUSION COEFFICIENT UNIT
1
1
3
PLC-PI
QDTGC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR GASEOUS MASS
TRANSFER AND DIFFUSION COEFFICIENT UNIT
1
1
4
PLC-PI
QCCC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR CRAKING COLUMN
1
1
5
PLC-PI
CAPC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR WETTED WALL GAS
ABSORTION COLUMN
1
1
6
PLC-PI
QUCC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR CRYSTALIZATION UNIT
1
1
7
PLC-PI
QRQC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR CHEMICAL REACTORS
TRAINING SYSTEM
1
1
8
1112PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
9
1112PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
10
1112PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
11
1112IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
12
1112CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
13
1112TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
14
1112MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 1112/PLC
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
CHEMICAL PROCESS. BASIC MODULE
Ref: 1120
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
EFLPC
EFLPC.Unit
EFLPC/CIB
DAB
EFLPC/CCSOF
2
EFLPC/CAL
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DESCRIPTION
DEEP BED FILTER UNIT, COMPUTER CONTROLLED.
FORMED BY:
DEEP BED FILTER UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR DEEP BED FILTER
UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ADQUISITION + DATA
MANGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR DEEP BED FILTER UNIT
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR DEEP
BED FILTER UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
EMLS
SOLID-LIQUID MIXING EQUIPMENT
1
EMLS/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
LIQUID/SOLID MIXING EQUIPMENT (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
EEC
CORROSION STUDY UNIT
1
EEC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
CORROSION STUDY UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
1
EII
ION EXCHANGE UNIT
1
EII/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR ION
EXCHANGE UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
SBANC
SBANC.Unit
SBANC/CIB
DAB
SBANC/CCSOF
TRAY DRIER,COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
TRAY DRIER
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR TRAY DRIER
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TRAY DRIER
1
1
1
1
1
10
SBANC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR TRAY
DRIER (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
11
SSPC
SSPC.Unit
SSPC/CIB
DAB
SSPC/CCSOF
COMPUTER CONTROLLED SPRAY DRIER, FORMED BY:
SPRAY DRIER
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR SPRAY DRIER
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION +DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FORSPRAY DRIER
1
1
1
1
1
12
SSPC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR SPRAY
DRIER (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
13
1120PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
14
1120IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
15
1120CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
16
1120TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
17
1120MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 1120
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
13.210 Water Treatment
EFLPC. Computer Controlled Deep Bed Filter Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Control
Interface Box
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
5 Cables and Accessories
- Data Management
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1
Unit: EFLPC. Deep Bed Filter Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
EFLPC Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Transparent filtration column of circular section, with removable inferior an superior covers. Support filter of the porous bed.
Filtering bed. Column height: 1300 mm. Valves to establish different circuits and regulate the flows. 30 Pressure sensors.
29 Sample capturing takings. Centrifugal pump, 0.6 kW, 2850 r.p.m.Tank with 2 reservoirs with 350 litres each one (700
litres total capacity); both reservoirs have water height level and system for agitation with help of the water return. Flow sensor.
Mesh filter.
2 EFLPC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer
controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors
involved in the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications
from the computer keyboard of the parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing
modifications, at any time and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface and the third one in the control software.
3
DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4
EFLPC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 2750 x 2400 x 1500 mm. Weight: 250 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Lost of initial load of a porous bed.
2.- Evolution with the time of the lost
load of the bed.
3.- Effectiveness of the filter. Saturation.
4.- Effectiveness of the filtration.
Clarification.
5.- Filter laundry. Fluidification.
6.- Washing and filtering circuits.
7.- The column may be readily adapted
for absorption and ion exchange
studies.
Other possible practices:
8.- Sensors calibration.
9-27.- Practices with PLC.
EII. Ion Exchange Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Self-contained unit either single bed water softening or double bed
system for demineralisation.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with
similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Exchange capacity of the different materials, as resins and used
reagents, as well as the problem water.
Use of simple or double bed for demineralisation.
4 tanks (treated water, demineralized water, hydrochloric acid and
sodium hydroxide).
Pump diaphragm type.
Flow meter 5 l./h,resistant to hydrochloric acid.
2 transparent vertical columns for the anionic and cationic resins,
volume: 0.16l. 1 spare column.
Valves and pipes circuit.
Conductivity meter (with conductivity cell): scale 0.0 to 19.99 µS.,
operating temperature: 0 to 50ºC., Accuracy +/-2%.
Typical commercial anionic and cationic resins.
Switch board.
Manuals: This unit is supplied 8 Manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1200 x 500 x 1000 mm. Weight: 50 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/environment/watertreatment/EII.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 47
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14.15.16.-
Study of general techniques of ion
exchange.
Familiarization with the operation
modes of column ionic exchange.
The exchange capabilities of
different resins materials.
Water softening using a cationic
resin.
Hard water softening (H+ ).
Hard water softening (OH - ).
Resin regeneration efficiency (H+ ).
Demineralisation.
Demineralisation efficiency.
Determination of saline ions
concentration.
Separation of Ni 2+ , Zn2+.
Hard water softening (sodic resin).
Resin regeneration efficiency (Na+ ).
How to operate the conductivity
meter.
Regeneration efficiency of a
softening system.
Desmineralisation using two-bed
exchange.
www.edibon.com
13. Environment
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/environment/watertreatment/EFLPC.pdf
EMLS. Liquid/Solid Mixing Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This unit permits the study of the agitation process in order to familiarise the
student with the different magnitudes (torque, turning speed, etc) that take
part in the process.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Brake Dynamo Motor: power: 0.37 kW, revolutions: from 0 to 3000 rpm.
Torque meter: crowbar (load cell): 18.3 cm., force range: 0 -39.2 N.
Carry-agitators: It is the element that allows installing different type of
agitators.
Vertical platform: It allows displacing the brake dynamo motor vertically. A
screw and transfer guide its activation by lineal bearings.
Agitators: shovel, dia.: 100 mm., shovel, dia.: 50 mm., turbine, dia.: 100
mm., turbine, dia.: 50 mm., helix, dia.: 100 mm., helix, dia.: 50 mm.
Tanks: they are cylindrical and of transparent material, with have removable
covers to avoid spills and splashes: 2 tanks of 300 mm dia. and 300 mm
height, one with deflectors and the other without deflectors; 2 tanks of 150
mm dia. and 300 mm height, one with deflectors and the other
without deflectors. The capacity of the tanks is approximately 21 and 5 litres.
The rotation speed of the turbine agitators oscillates between 1000-2500
rpm, and it is possible to obtain 3000 rpm. The propeller agitators are used
for mixing with a viscosity superior to 2000 cp. Speed controller.
Cables and accessories for normal operation.
Manuals: This unit is supplied 8 Manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1940 x 700 x 910 mm. Weight: 95 Kg.
1.- Visualization of fluid fields.
2.- Power required in the agitation
process.
3.- Suspensions of solid in liquids.
4.- Formation of solutions solidsliquids.
5.- Emulsion of unmiscible liquids.
6.- Mixing of miscible liquids.
7.- Heating process of liquid masses.
8.- Test with models at scale.
9.- Quality of mixing / mixing time.
10.-Power speed of the different
impellers.
11.- Demonstration of the different
factors (deposits, deflectors,
agitators...) That affect the mixing,
using visualization techniques and
appropiate measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocess/EMLS.pdf
EEC. Corrosion Study Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The “EEC” unit allows the corrosion simultaneous study of up 8 corrosion
cells, each containing different test specimens.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
8 glass cells. Each one consisting of: a 600 ml. vessel (Pyrex) with a cover.
Such cover has four orifices: two to adapt the test sheets, one for the
reference electrode and another one for the gases diffuser tube.
Number of cells selector. Simultaneous study of corrosion in several cells.
Ag/AgCl reference electrode.
A group of test sheets (electrodes): It consists of 40 x 20 mm. sheets of
variable thickness depending on the material, and on materials such as
stainless steel, carbon steel, zinc, brass, copper, aluminum, graphite, and
iron (nails). Connection cables with 4 mm terminals for the reference
electrode (Ag/AgCl) and the test sheets. Laboratory digital pH-meter. Air
pump for agitation. Air pump switch.
Connection for air pump.
Inert gas inlet. (If the customer wants to work in other kind of atmosphere).
Milliammeter. Millivoltmeter. Milliammeter/ Millivoltmeter selector.
Two rotameters (flow meters): One for the air and another one for the gas.
Flow rate: 1-7.5 l/min. Power supply of direct current (D. C.) with 0-30V and
0-3A output, with intensity and voltage indicator. Control valves for air and
gas flow. Unit main switch. Safety differential switch.
Manuals: This unit is supplied 8 Manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1200 x 300 x500 mm. Weight: 50 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocess/EEC.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.-
Galvanic potentials.
Galvanic pairs study.
Iron passivation.
pH influence.
Aluminium anodization.
Cathodic protection.
Galvanic corrosion + oxidation.
Efect of dissolved oxygen
concentration.
9.- Electrolytic corrosion.
10.- Chemical inhibition.
11.- Prevention of scaling.
12.- Effect of internal stress.
13.- Simultaneous study of corrosion in
several cells.
Other possible practices:
14.- Water treatment studies:
- Calcium carbonate stabilization.
- Oxidation of iron and manganese
in ground waters.
- Water softening by chemical
precipitation.
- Disinfection of waste water with
chlorine solutions.
ESED. Sedimentation Study Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The sedimentation is a process widely used in the classification (by either
equivalence or density), water clarification and wastewater treatment.
“ESED” unit provides a facility for studying the basic physical procesess
involved in sedimentation, which the applications cover fields like chemical
engineering, or concentration, water treatment and other industrial
processes.
Five graduated cylinders of methacrylate (1m x 50 mm approx.) mounted
vertically on a panel, illuminated from behind, and with the possibility of
being removable for cleaning.
Stopwatch.
Screen with two fluorescent tubes.
Three beakers.
Specific gravity bottle.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 550 x 400 x 1300 mm. Weight: 35 Kg.
1.- Variation of the sedimentation
characteristics with the
concentration a n d s u s p e n s i o n
height.
2.- Effect of initial concentration on
sedimentation characteristics.
3.- E f f e c t o f i n i t i a l h e i g h t o n
sedimentation characteristics.
4.- Construction of the rate of settling
curver against concentration
form a single batch test.
5.- Effect of particle size distribution.
7.- Identification of the different
sedimentation regimens.
8.- Use of flocculating additives.
9.- Construction of settling rate curves.
10.- Visualization of the retarded
sedimentation.
11.- Study of the differences between a
clarified and classifier.
12.- Study and visualization of the
differential sedimentation.
13.- Study of the methods of sinking and
floating.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocess/ESED.pdf
QMS. Solids Handling Study Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This unit is designed to introduce students in different aspects of solids
behaviour, unit operations such as size reduction, mixing, transport,
discharge, weighting, etc.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Ball mill with various sizes of balls.
Motor for the ball mill.
Vibratory shaker and a set of eight sieves with several hole mesh from 2 mm
to 0.063 mm.
V-Blender.
Motor for the V-Blender.
Blowing and ejector.
Compressor.
Cyclone and pneumatic conveyor. Rotary cylinder.
Hoppers with different sizes of exit orifices. Collecting tray.
Balance. Graduated test tube.
Manuals: This unit is supplied 8 Manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1020x840x1680 mm. Weight: 200 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocess/QMS.pdf
Page 19
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Sieving techniques.
2.- To determine the angle of repose.
3.- To determine bulk solids parameters
of density.
4.- Hopper discharge. To use the
hopper to measure solids discharge
rates and relate to initial load and
hoper exit orifice size.
5.- Cyclone operation.
6.- Pneumatic conveying.
7.- Observe the comminution of
granular solids processed through a
ball mill.
8.- Study of solids mixing.
9.- Study of the solids properties.
10.- Solids weighing: Balance.
Other possible practices:
11.- Mixer operation.
12.- Siever operation.
www.edibon.com
11.Chemical Engineering
11.410 Chemical Process
11.5- Chemical Process (Agronomical Industry)
11
SBANC. Computer Controlled Tray Drier
Always included
in the supply:
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
11.Chemical Engineering
2
1
Unit: SBANC. Tray Drier
3
Teaching
Technique
used
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
SBANC Unit:
This unit has been designed for studying fluid mechanics, surfaces chemistry, solid structures and substances and energy
balances, related to the drying processes. Its size is specially appropriate for laboratories.
This tray drier dries solids by passing a stream of hot air over trays of wet material.
Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and main metallic elements in stainless steel. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Stainless steel rectangular conduct (1000 x 320 x 300 mm), which includes a support, a drying chamber with a door and a
set of four bans, a square nozzle 300 mm long, whose side goes from 315 to 100 mm progressively.
Shielded Propeller Fan, with speed control from computer (PC). Fan protector.
Weighing system for following the changes in weight of the solid due the evaporation or vaporisation of moisture during
operation. Load Cell-force sensor.
7 Temperature Sensors: 2 temperature sensors of Dry and Wet Bulb, before the electrical resistance. 1 temperature sensor in
the electrical resistance. 2 temperature sensors of Dry and Wet Bulb, after the electrical resistance. 2 temperature sensors of
Dry and Wet Bulb, after the drying chamber.
Differential pressure sensor.
Air flow sensor.
Humidity sensor.
Electrical heater (resistance 3KW), computer controlled.
2 SBANC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time
curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to
avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 SBANC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 2000x320x400 mm. Weight: 190 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/agronomicalindustry/
SBANC.pdf
1.- Demonstration of drying rate
regimens.
2.- Determination of the efficiency of the
warm-up resistance.
3.- Effect of the warm-up in an
installation.
4.- Heat and mass transfer analogies.
5.- Obtaining of drying curves.
6.- Influence of the particle size.
7.- Influence of the air speed.
8.- Influence of the air temperature.
9.- Application of the psychometric in
the drying.
Other possible practices:
10.-Example of the determination of the
properties of the air.
11.-Use of a psychometric map.
12.-Determination of the air flow.
13.-Dynamic simulation of the control
systems.
14.-Sensors calibration.
Practices to be done by PLC Module
(PLC-PI)+PLC Control Software:
15.-Control of the SBANC unit process
through the control interface box
without the computer.
16.-Visualization of all the sensors values
used in the SBANC unit process.
17.-Calibration of all sensors included in
the SBANC unit process.
18.-Hand on of all the actuators involved
in the SBANC unit process.
19.-Realization of different experiments,
in automatic way, without having in
front the unit. (This experiment can
be decided previously).
20.-Simulation of outside actions, in the
cases do not exist hardware
elements. (Example: test of
complementary tanks,
complementary industrial
environment to the process to be
studied, etc).
21-33.- Practices with PLC.
11.6- Chemical Process (Special)
EPIRC. Computer Controlled Pyrolisis Unit
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocessspecial/EPIRC.pdf
PLGC. Computer Controlled Gas Washing Processing Plant
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocessspecial/PLGC.pdf
PPDAC. Computer Controlled Water Demineralization and Processing Plant
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocessspecial/PPDAC.pdf
Page 22
11.4- Chemical Process
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=chemicalengineering&subarea=chemicalprocess&lang=en
EMLS. Liquid/Solid Mixing Unit
EEC. Corrosion Study Unit
ESED. Sedimentation Study Unit
QMS. Solids Handling Study Unit
LFFC. Computer Controlled Fixed and Fluidised Bed Unit
QEDC. Computer Controlled Batch Solvent Extraction and
Desolventising Unit
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
2
Control
Interface Box
3
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
CONTROL
1
PID CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Unit: LFFC. Fixed and Fluidised Bed Unit
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
Board
- Data Management
1
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Unit: QEDC. Batch Solvent Extraction and
Desolventising Unit
Other available Units:
-EFLPC. Computer Controlled Deep Bed Filter Unit
-EII.
(see page 62)
(see page 79)
Ion Exchange Unit (see page 79)
11.5- Chemical Process (Agronomical Industry)
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=chemicalengineering&subarea=agronomicalindustry&lang=en
SBANC. Computer Controlled Tray Drier
NE
W
SSPC. Computer Controlled Spray Drier
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
11
3
2
1
Unit: SBANC. Tray Drier
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
2
Control
Interface Box
3
4
Data
Acquisition
Board
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
PID CONTROL
6 Manuals
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
PID CONTROL
11.Chemical Engineering
-TFUC. Computer Controlled Continuous and Batch Filtration Unit
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
1
Unit: SSPC. Spray Drier
11.6- Chemical Process (Special)
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=chemicalengineering&subarea=chemicalprocessspecial&lang=en
Available Units:
-EPIRC. Computer Controlled Pyrolysis Unit
-PLGC. Computer Controlled Gas Washing Process Plant
-PPDAC. Computer Controlled Water Demineralization and Processing Plant
Non computer controlled version available too.
Page 73
www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 1120/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
EFLPC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR DEEP BED FILTER
UNIT
1
1
2
PLC-PI
SBANC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR TRAY DRIER
1
1
3
PLC-PI
SSPC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR SPRAY DRIER
1
1
4
1120PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
5
1120PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
1120IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
7
1120CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
8
1120TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
9
1120MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
CHEMICAL PROCESS. MEDIUM MODULE
Ref: 1121
ITEM
1 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
ESED
SEDIMENTATION STUDY UNIT
1
2
ESED/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING FOR SEDIMENTATION
STUDY UNIT
1
3
LFFC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED FIXED AND FLUIDISED BED
UNIT, FORMED BY:
FIXED AND FLUIDISED BED UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FIXED AND FLUIDISED
BED UNIT,COMPUTER CONTROLLED
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR FIXED AND FLUIDISED
BED UNIT
1
LFFC.Unit
LFFC/CIB
DAB
LFFC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
4
LFFC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR FIXED
AND FLUIDISED BED UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
1
5
QEDC
BATCH SOLVENT EXTRACTION AND DESOLVENTISING
UNIT, COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
BATCH SOLVENT EXTRACTION AND DESOLVENTISING
EQUIPMENT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR BATCH SOLVENT
EXTRACTION AND DESOLVENTISING EQUIPMENT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR BATCH SOLVENT
EXTRACTION AND DESOLVENTISING EQUIPMENT
1
QEDC.Unit
QEDC/CIB
DAB
QEDC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
6
QEDC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR BATCH
SOLVENT EXTRACTION AND DESOLVENTISING
EQUIPMENT (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
7
QMS
SOLIDS HANDLING STUDY UNIT
1
8
QMSC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR SOLIDS
HANDLING STUDY EQUIPMENT (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
9
TFUC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED CONTINUOUS AND BATCH
FILTRATION UNIT, FORMED BY:
CONTINUOUS AND BATCH FILTRATION UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR CONTINUOUS AND
BATCH FILTRATION UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR CONTINUOUS AND
BATCH FILTRATION UNIT
1
TFUC.Unit
TFUC/CIB
DAB
TFUC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
10
TFUC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED CONTINUOUS AND BATCH
FILTRATION UNIT
1
11
1121PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
12
1121PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
13
1121IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
14
1121CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
15
1121TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
16
1121MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 1121
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
EMLS. Liquid/Solid Mixing Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This unit permits the study of the agitation process in order to familiarise the
student with the different magnitudes (torque, turning speed, etc) that take
part in the process.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Brake Dynamo Motor: power: 0.37 kW, revolutions: from 0 to 3000 rpm.
Torque meter: crowbar (load cell): 18.3 cm., force range: 0 -39.2 N.
Carry-agitators: It is the element that allows installing different type of
agitators.
Vertical platform: It allows displacing the brake dynamo motor vertically. A
screw and transfer guide its activation by lineal bearings.
Agitators: shovel, dia.: 100 mm., shovel, dia.: 50 mm., turbine, dia.: 100
mm., turbine, dia.: 50 mm., helix, dia.: 100 mm., helix, dia.: 50 mm.
Tanks: they are cylindrical and of transparent material, with have removable
covers to avoid spills and splashes: 2 tanks of 300 mm dia. and 300 mm
height, one with deflectors and the other without deflectors; 2 tanks of 150
mm dia. and 300 mm height, one with deflectors and the other
without deflectors. The capacity of the tanks is approximately 21 and 5 litres.
The rotation speed of the turbine agitators oscillates between 1000-2500
rpm, and it is possible to obtain 3000 rpm. The propeller agitators are used
for mixing with a viscosity superior to 2000 cp. Speed controller.
Cables and accessories for normal operation.
Manuals: This unit is supplied 8 Manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1940 x 700 x 910 mm. Weight: 95 Kg.
1.- Visualization of fluid fields.
2.- Power required in the agitation
process.
3.- Suspensions of solid in liquids.
4.- Formation of solutions solidsliquids.
5.- Emulsion of unmiscible liquids.
6.- Mixing of miscible liquids.
7.- Heating process of liquid masses.
8.- Test with models at scale.
9.- Quality of mixing / mixing time.
10.-Power speed of the different
impellers.
11.- Demonstration of the different
factors (deposits, deflectors,
agitators...) That affect the mixing,
using visualization techniques and
appropiate measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocess/EMLS.pdf
EEC. Corrosion Study Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The “EEC” unit allows the corrosion simultaneous study of up 8 corrosion
cells, each containing different test specimens.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
8 glass cells. Each one consisting of: a 600 ml. vessel (Pyrex) with a cover.
Such cover has four orifices: two to adapt the test sheets, one for the
reference electrode and another one for the gases diffuser tube.
Number of cells selector. Simultaneous study of corrosion in several cells.
Ag/AgCl reference electrode.
A group of test sheets (electrodes): It consists of 40 x 20 mm. sheets of
variable thickness depending on the material, and on materials such as
stainless steel, carbon steel, zinc, brass, copper, aluminum, graphite, and
iron (nails). Connection cables with 4 mm terminals for the reference
electrode (Ag/AgCl) and the test sheets. Laboratory digital pH-meter. Air
pump for agitation. Air pump switch.
Connection for air pump.
Inert gas inlet. (If the customer wants to work in other kind of atmosphere).
Milliammeter. Millivoltmeter. Milliammeter/ Millivoltmeter selector.
Two rotameters (flow meters): One for the air and another one for the gas.
Flow rate: 1-7.5 l/min. Power supply of direct current (D. C.) with 0-30V and
0-3A output, with intensity and voltage indicator. Control valves for air and
gas flow. Unit main switch. Safety differential switch.
Manuals: This unit is supplied 8 Manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1200 x 300 x500 mm. Weight: 50 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocess/EEC.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.-
Galvanic potentials.
Galvanic pairs study.
Iron passivation.
pH influence.
Aluminium anodization.
Cathodic protection.
Galvanic corrosion + oxidation.
Efect of dissolved oxygen
concentration.
9.- Electrolytic corrosion.
10.- Chemical inhibition.
11.- Prevention of scaling.
12.- Effect of internal stress.
13.- Simultaneous study of corrosion in
several cells.
Other possible practices:
14.- Water treatment studies:
- Calcium carbonate stabilization.
- Oxidation of iron and manganese
in ground waters.
- Water softening by chemical
precipitation.
- Disinfection of waste water with
chlorine solutions.
ESED. Sedimentation Study Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The sedimentation is a process widely used in the classification (by either
equivalence or density), water clarification and wastewater treatment.
“ESED” unit provides a facility for studying the basic physical procesess
involved in sedimentation, which the applications cover fields like chemical
engineering, or concentration, water treatment and other industrial
processes.
Five graduated cylinders of methacrylate (1m x 50 mm approx.) mounted
vertically on a panel, illuminated from behind, and with the possibility of
being removable for cleaning.
Stopwatch.
Screen with two fluorescent tubes.
Three beakers.
Specific gravity bottle.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 550 x 400 x 1300 mm. Weight: 35 Kg.
1.- Variation of the sedimentation
characteristics with the
concentration a n d s u s p e n s i o n
height.
2.- Effect of initial concentration on
sedimentation characteristics.
3.- E f f e c t o f i n i t i a l h e i g h t o n
sedimentation characteristics.
4.- Construction of the rate of settling
curver against concentration
form a single batch test.
5.- Effect of particle size distribution.
7.- Identification of the different
sedimentation regimens.
8.- Use of flocculating additives.
9.- Construction of settling rate curves.
10.- Visualization of the retarded
sedimentation.
11.- Study of the differences between a
clarified and classifier.
12.- Study and visualization of the
differential sedimentation.
13.- Study of the methods of sinking and
floating.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocess/ESED.pdf
QMS. Solids Handling Study Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This unit is designed to introduce students in different aspects of solids
behaviour, unit operations such as size reduction, mixing, transport,
discharge, weighting, etc.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Ball mill with various sizes of balls.
Motor for the ball mill.
Vibratory shaker and a set of eight sieves with several hole mesh from 2 mm
to 0.063 mm.
V-Blender.
Motor for the V-Blender.
Blowing and ejector.
Compressor.
Cyclone and pneumatic conveyor. Rotary cylinder.
Hoppers with different sizes of exit orifices. Collecting tray.
Balance. Graduated test tube.
Manuals: This unit is supplied 8 Manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1020x840x1680 mm. Weight: 200 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocess/QMS.pdf
Page 19
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Sieving techniques.
2.- To determine the angle of repose.
3.- To determine bulk solids parameters
of density.
4.- Hopper discharge. To use the
hopper to measure solids discharge
rates and relate to initial load and
hoper exit orifice size.
5.- Cyclone operation.
6.- Pneumatic conveying.
7.- Observe the comminution of
granular solids processed through a
ball mill.
8.- Study of solids mixing.
9.- Study of the solids properties.
10.- Solids weighing: Balance.
Other possible practices:
11.- Mixer operation.
12.- Siever operation.
www.edibon.com
11.Chemical Engineering
11.410 Chemical Process
11.4- Chemical Process
11
(continuation)
LFFC. Computer Controlled Fixed and Fluidised Bed Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
11.Chemical Engineering
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: LFFC. Fixed and Fluidised Bed Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
LFFC Unit:
Bench top Unit for the study of fixed and fluidised beds of solid particles. “LFFC” unit allows a full study about everything
concerning the flow of a fluid through a bed, both packed and fluidised. The unit allows the simultaneous study of the water
and air flow through the bed.
Anodized aluminium structure. Panels in painted steel and main metallic elements in stainless steel. Diagram in the front
panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
2 Transparent cylindrical columns, one for air and one for water, each column diameter: 50 mm and height: 550 mm, with
bed plates. Two sizes of bed material (glass pearls) are supplied, 170/300 and 250/420 micron ranges. The columns are
demountable in order to remove the particle bed. Each column has tapping points. Water tank of 10 l. Water pump.
Compressor. Water regulation valve and flowmeter of 0-2 l/min water .Air regulation valve and flowmeter up to 0100l./min. air. Air flow sensor. Water flow sensor. 2 Differential pressure sensors.
2 LFFC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time
curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to
avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the parameters, at any
moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of parameters involved in
the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
LFFC/CCSOF.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
4
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 700x570x870 mm. Weight: 50 Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocess/
1.-
Verification of Carman-Kozeny’s
equation.
2.- Pressure drop through packed and
fluidised beds, for air and water
systems.
3- Onset of fluidisation.
4.- Study of differences between
particulate and aggregative
fluidisation.
5.- Simultaneous study of air and water
systems and observation of
phenomenon of “bubbling”.
6.- Study of the pressure drop in
packed and fluidised cakes (Liquid:
water).
7.- Study of the pressure drop in
packed and fluidised cakes (Fluid:
air), fine cake particle.
8.- Study of the pressure drop in
packed and fluidised cakes (Fluid:
air), thick cake particle.
Other possible practices:
9.- Sensors calibration.
10-28- Practices with PLC.
LFFC.pdf
QEDC. Computer Controlled Batch Solvent Extraction and Desolventising Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
Board
- Data Management
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1
Unit: QEDC. Batch Solvent Extraction and
Desolventising Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
QEDC. Unit:
Unit designed to allow instruction/teaching and research into the principle of solid-liquid extraction. It is capable of carrying
out a variety of solid/liquid extractions (particularly suitable for edible oils from oil-bearing seeds) and desolventising both the
extracted solids and the miscella. Batch process.
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and
main metallic elements in stainless steel. Elements in contact with process material are constructed in stainless steel,
borosilicate glass, etc.
Extractor vessel. (100 l. total volume which allows a solids working capacity of 25 kg.) Miscella vessel (30 l. volume). Waste
water tank ( 15 l. volume). Solvent Condenser. Solvent water separator tank (16 l. volume). Solvent pump (centrifugal type).
Vacuum pump (diaphragm type). Temperature, Pressure and Flow sensors. Flameproof electrical equipment is
specified to be compatible with most common solvents.
Modes of operation: Extraction by washing with clean solvent. Extraction by recirculating miscella. Desolventising extracted
material. Desolventising miscella.
2 QEDC/CIB. Control Interface Box
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time
curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to
avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 QEDC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit:1800x1000x1800 mm. Weight: 750 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocess/
QEDC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 20
1.- Effect of degree of pretreatment of
solid material on extraction
efficiency.
2.- Effect of extraction time.
3.- Effect of drain time.
4.- Study the effect of solvent type.
5.- Effect of solvent percolation rate.
6.- Effect of process temperature.
7.- Effect of process pressure.
8.- Method of solvent recovery.
9.- Degree of solvent recovery.
10.-Operation of small scale version
of industrial processes.
Other possible practices:
11.-Sensors calibration.
12- 30- Practices with PLC.
11.410 Chemical Process
(continuation)
TFUC. Computer Controlled Batch Filtration Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
5
6
1
Unit TFUC. Batch Filtration Unit
Data
Acquisition
Board
Cables and Accessories
Manuals
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
TFUC Unit:
This filtration unit demonstrates the principles of batch filtration using a fully functional plate and frame filter system.
Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and main metallic elements in stainless steel. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
The unitconsists of a feed tank connecting to a pump which feeds a slurry to the plate and frame filter press. The filter unit uses
gaskets to prevent leakage. A controller enables constant pressure operation by controlling the speed of the feed pump.
Variable feed flow rate control. Water and calcium carbonate are the recommended working materials. Optical absorbence
sensor. Pressure sensors. Temperature sensor.
2 TFUC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time
curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to
avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TFUC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 1200x600x800 mm. Weight: 60 Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocess/
1.- Understanding the principles of
batch filtration using both constant
pressure a n d c o n s t a n t f l o w
operating modes.
2.- Demonstrating filtration through
membrane technology.
3.- Mass balancing.
4.- Precoat and body aid filtration.
5.- Demonstration of precoat filtration.
6.- O p t i m i s a t i o n o f f i l t r a t i o n
performance using body aid.
7.- Determining important criteria for
scale-up.
8.- Demonstration of Darcy’s Law.
9.- Effect of body aid on medium and
cake resistances.
10.-Determination of medium and cake
resistances.
11.-Filter cake washing and dewatering.
12.-Study of commercial aspects of
filtration and optimisation of filtration
operations.
13.-Sensors calibration.
14-32.- Practices with PLC.
TFUC.pdf
Page 21
www.edibon.com
11.Chemical Engineering
3
2
Control
Interface Box
Technical and Vocational Education Chemical Engineering Laboratory
(11TV)
List of modules and teaching units included plus
Summarised Catalogues
Priority 2
0200. Electronics
0230: Transducers and Sensors Module
0800. Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
0813-810/20S: Elementary Fluid Mechanics (20 CAI + CAL)
0900. Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
0950/20S: Heat Transfer Basic Module (20 CAI + CAL)
0950/PLC: PLC's Module
0953/20S: Heat Exchange Basic Module (20 CAI + CAL)
0953/PLC: PLC's Module
1000. Process Control
1010: Process Control Basic Module
1010/PLC: PLC's Module
1011: Process Control Medium Module
1011/PLC: PLC's Module
1000/ESN: EDIBON Scada-Net for Process Control and Thermodynamics Units
Ref.:11TV-pre(01/11)
issue:01/11
TRANSDUCERS AND SENSORS MODULE
Ref: 0230
1 / 2
ITEM
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
SAIT
TRANSDUCERS AND INSTRUMENTATION TRAINER
1
2
SAIT/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
TRANSDUCERS AND INSTRUMENTATION
1
3
SAIT/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
TRANSDUCERS AND INSTRUMENTATION (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
4
BS
MODULAR SYSTEM FOR THE STUDY OF SENSORS,
COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
BASIC UNIT WITH COMPUTER CONTROLLED
INTERFACE FOR MODULAR SYSTEM FOR THE STUDY
OF SENSORS
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR MODULAR SYSTEM FOR
THE STUDY OF SENSORS
VIBRATIONS AND /OR DEFORMATION MODULE
TEMPERATURE MODULE
PRESSURE MODULE
FLOW MODULE
OVENS MODULE
LIQUID LEVEL MODULE
TACHOMETER MODULE
PROXIMITY MODULE
PNEUMATIC MODULE
LIGHT TEST MODULE
BSPC
DAB
BS/CCSOF
BS-1
BS-2
BS-3
BS-4
BS-5
BS-6
BS-7
BS-8
BS-9
BS-10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
BS/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
MODULAR SYSTEM FOR THE STUDY OF SENSORS
1
6
BS/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
STUDY OF SENSORS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS) OF THE MODULES: BS-1 VIBRATIONS,
BS-2 TEMPERATURE, BS-3 PRESSURE, BS-4 FLOW,
BS-5 OVENS, BS-6 LIQUID LEVEL, BS-7
TACHOMETER, BS-8 PROXIMITY & BS-9 PNEUMATIC
1
7
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
8
EDAS/VIS-0.25
1
DAIB
DAB
EDAS/SOF
EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
second), FORMED BY:
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
VIS
9
1
0230PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
10
0230PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
11
0230IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
12
0230CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
13
0230TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
14
0230MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0230
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.3- Transducers and Sensors
(continuation)
SAIT. Transducers and Instrumentation Trainer
Optional:
EDAS/VIS.
EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Data Acquisition Interface Box
Data
Acquisition
Board
Data Acquisition
and Virtual
Instrumentation
Software
SAIT. Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The SAIT trainer shows didactically the function principles
of the transducers most used in industry. It is divided into
two parts: the lower part, in which all the input and output
transducers are found, while in the upper part, the system
of signal conditioning and those of instrumentation are
found; the electrical and pneumatic power supplies are
housed in its interior.
Input Transducers:
Resistance Transducers for applications in angular or
linear position:
Linearly sliding potentiometer. Rotary carbon-track
potentiometer. Rotary coil potentiometer. Precision
servo- potentiometer. The Wheatstone Bridge circuit.
Applications of temperature:
NTC (Negative Temperature Coefficient)
Thermistors. RTD Sensor (Platinum Transducer with
Temperature dependent Resistance). Temperature
sensor IC “Integrated Circuit LM 335”. Type “K”
Thermocouples.
Applications of light:
Photovoltaic Cell. Phototransistor. Photodiode PIN.
Photoconductive Cell.
Linear position and force:
Linear Variable Differential Transformer LVDT.
Extensiometric Transducer.
Environmental measurements:
Air flow Sensor. Air pressure Sensor. Humidity sensor.
Rotational speed and position control:
Slotted optoelectronic Sensor. Opto-reflective
Sensor. Inductive sensor. Hall effect Sensor.
Permanent D.C. magnet tachogenerator.
Sound measurements:
Dynamical microphone. Ultrasonic receiver.
Visualization Devices:
Timing device/ counter with LED display. Graphic bar
visualizer. Mobile coil voltmeter.
Output Transducers:
Electrical Resistance. Incandescent Lamp.
Applications for the sound output:
Buzzing (Buzzer). Mobile coil loud speaker. Ultrasonic
transmitter.
Applications of linear or angular motion:
D.C. Soleinod. D.C. Relay. Solenoid Valve.
Permanent Magnet D.C. Motor.
Signal Conditioners:
D.C. Amplifiers. A.C. Amplifier. Power Amplifier.
Current Amplifier. Buffers. Inverting Amplifier.
Differential amplifier. V/F and F/V Converters. V/I
and I/V Converters. Full Wave Rectifier. Hysteresis
convertible Comparator. Electronic switch. Oscillator
40 kHz. Filter 40 kHz. Time-constant convertible
Low Pass Filter.
Circuit with Mathematical Operation: Adding
amplifier. Integrator with different time constants.
Differentiator with different time constants.
Instrumentation Amplifier. Circuit SAMPLE & HOLD.
Amplifiers with gain control and offset.
Furthermore it contains a linearly mounted system of a
D.C. motor, tachodynamo, reflective, slotted optosensors to detect the absolute and incremental position.
Cables.
Manuals: 8 manuals supplied.
Dimensions (approx.): 400 x 400 x 300 mm.
Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
electronics/transducerssensors/SAIT.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Basic Control Systems description.
Characteristics of the Control System:
2.- Characteristics of an ON/OFF temperature
control System.
3.- Characteristics of an ON/ OFF Lighting System.
4.- Investigation of the Characteristics of a Positional
Control System.
5. - Proportional Control.
6.- Proportional+Integral Control.
7. - Proportional+DerivateControl.
8. - Proportional+Integral+Derivate Control.
9. - Characteristics of a Speed Control System.
10.- Operation in Open Loop.
11.- Operation in Closed Loop, Proportional Control.
12.- Proportional+Integral Control.
13.- Proportional+Integral+Derivate Control.
Display devices:
14.- Application of the Timer/Counter as a meter of
time.
15.- Application of the Timer/Counter as a simple counter.
16.- Application of the Timer/Counter as rev-counter or
frequency-meter.
17.- Characteristics of an L.E.D. bargraph display unit.
18.- Characteristic of a Mobile Coil Meter.
19.- Comparison of Digital, Bargraph and Mobile Coil
meters.
20.- To widen the voltage index of the B. M. meter.
Variable Resistance transducers in angle or linear
arrangement:
21.- Variation of the Output Voltage for a
Potentiometer used as a Position transducer.
22.- The Buffer as compensator for the effect of the load
on the output voltage of a potentiometer.
23.- Servo potentiometer. Variation of the output
voltage with respect to its position.
24.- Measuring the Resistance using a Wheatstone
Bridge Circuit.
25.- Measuring the Voltage using “Null Balance”
Procedures (Method1).
26.- Measuring Voltages using “Null Balance”
Procedures (Method 2).Measuring voltages
smaller than the normal available voltage.
27.- Measuring Voltages using “Null Balance”
Procedures (Method 2).Measuring voltages
greater than the normal voltage.
Transducers for Applications of Temperature
Measurement:
28.- Characteristics of an Integrated Temperature Circuit.
29.- Construction of a Digital Thermometer using the
facilities of the TRANSDUCER TRAINER.
30.- Characteristics of a Platinum Temperature
Dependent Resistance (T.D.R.) Transducer.
31.- T h e N . T. C . ( N e g a t i v e Te m p e r a t u r e
coefficient)Thermistor.
32.- Characteristics of an N.T.C. Thermistor
(Resistance measuring method).
33.- Characteristics of the N.T.C. Thermistor used in an
alarm circuit (double thermistor).
34.- Characteristics of a Type “K” Thermocouple.
Transducers for Light Measuring Applications:
35.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.
36.- Characteristics of a photo-transistor.
37.- Luminous intensity detector.
38.-The P.I.N. Photodiode.
39.- Characteristics of a P.I.N. Photodiode.
Page 22
Linear Position transducers.
40.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable Differential
Transformer (LVDT).
41.- Characteristics of a Variable Resistance.
42.- Characteristics of a Strain gauge Transducer.
Transducers for Environmental Measurement
Applications:
43.- Characteristics of a air flow transducer.
44.- Characteristics of a pressure sensor.
45.- Characteristics of a humidity sensor.
Rotational Velocity Transducers or Position Measuring
Applications:
46.- Characteristics of a slotted opto-transducers and its
applications for counting and speed measurement.
47.- Characteristics of the reflective optotransducers
and Gray code disk.
48.- Characteristics of an inductive transducer.
49.- Characteristics of a Hall effect transducer.
50.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent magnet
Tachogenerator.
Transducers for Measuring Sound:
51.- Characteristics of a Dynamic Microphone.
52.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic receiver.
Transducers for Sound Output:
53.- Characteristics of the mobile coil loudspeaker.
54.- Characteristics of a Buzzer.
Output Transducer for Linear or Angular Movement:
55.- Characteristics of a D.C. Solenoid.
56.- Characteristics of a D.C. Relay.
57.- Characteristics of a Solenoid air valve.
58.- Characteristics of a Permanent Magnet Motor.
Signal Conditioning Circuits:
59.- Characteristics of the Direct Current amplifiers 1,
2 and x100.
60.- Characteristics of a current amplifier and
application of a buffer amplifier.
61.- Characteristics of Power and Buffer Amplifiers.
62.- Characteristics of an Inverter Amplifier.
63.- Characteristics of a Differential Amplifier.
Signal Converter Circuits:
64.- Characteristics of a Voltage to Current Converter.
65.- Characteristics of a Current to Voltage Converter.
66.-Characteristics of a Voltage to Frequency
Converter.
67.-Characteristics of a Frequency to Voltage
Converter.
68.- Characteristics of a Full Wave Rectifier.
Comparators, Oscillator and Filters:
69.- Characteristics of a Comparator.
70.- Characteristics of an Alarm Oscillator circuit.
71.- Characteristics of an Electronic Switch.
72.- Characteristics of the Oscillator of 40 kHz.
73.- Characteristics of Filters.
Circuits that carry out Mathematical Operations:
74.- Characteristics of a Adding Amplifier.
75.- Characteristics of an Integrator.
76.- Characteristics of a Differentiator Circuit.
77.- Characteristics of a Sample and Hold Circuit.
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.3- Transducers and Sensors
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
2
1
Test Modules
Base Units:
2
(common for all test modules type “BS”)
(to be used with Base Units)
Test Modules
(to be used with Base Units)
BS6
BS1
BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA.
EDIBON Computer Control System
Base
Unit
BS2
Computer
Data Acquisition
Board
(not included
in the supply)
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
BS7
OR
BSUB. Base Unit (non computer controlled).
BS3
BS8
BS4
BS9
BS5
Other modules
“BS” System includes a set of electronic components with a twofold purpose: to control the signal produced by the transducers, and to evaluate and quantify it.
Sensors or transducers are common elements in the state of our technology. Therefore this SYSTEM has been developed to show the basic principles of different types
of sensors and their way of processing signals.
This system consists of:
1 Base Unit, to control the system:
Option 1: BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit, including EDIBON Computer Control System. OR
Option 2: BSUB. Base Unit (non computer controlled).
2 Test Modules:
BS1. Vibration and/or Deformation Test
Module.
BS2. Temperature Test Module.
BS3. Pressure Test Module.
BS4.
BS5.
BS6.
BS7.
Flow Test Module.
Ovens Test Module.
Liquid Level Test Module.
Tachometers Test Module.
BS8. Proximity Test Module.
BS9. Pneumatic Test Module.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 18
(continuation)
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
(continuation)
1
Base Units
BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Unit to control the system. Common for the different test modules type “BS”. Elements of the unit are included in a stainless steel box. In the
back panel of the box, we can find the outlet and the general switch of the unit for its operation. In the front panel there are two masks with
all type of signal conditioners, and even an analogical voltmeter.
Amplifiers: Several amplifier circuits of DC are included in the Base Unit, but only three are used specifically for the amplifiers applications:
Amplifier 1, Amplifier 2, Amplifier 3. AC amplifier. Power amplifier. Current amplifier. Two buffer amplifiers. Inverter amplifier. Two
circuits of differential amplifiers are supplied.
Signal Converters Circuits: Converter from Voltage to Current. Converter from Current to Voltage. Converter from Voltage to Frequency.
Converter of Frequency to Voltage (F/V). Full-Wave Rectifier. Phase rectifier. Phase shifter. Semiconductor detector of temperature.
Comparators, Generators, Oscillators and Filters: Comparator. Alarm oscillator. Electronic switch. Oscillator. Filters. Integrator. The
differentiator. Circuit “Sample and Hold”. Pulse generator. Pulse Receiver. PID Control. Power Control. Low Frequency Oscillator.
Current generator.
Others:Supply Sources of Direct Current (1A). Power source (4A). 4 Potentiometers of 1K, 5K, 10K and 20K.
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System:
Control Interface integrated in the unit box (BSPC). Data acquisition board to be installed in a computer slot.
Computer Control Software.
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 490x450x470 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BSUB. Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Unit to control the system. Common for the different test modules type “BS”. Elements of the unit are included in a stainless steel box. In the
back panel of the box, we can find the outlet and the general switch of the unit for its operation. In the front panel there are two masks with
all type of signal conditioners, and even an analogical voltmeter.
Amplifiers: Several amplifier circuits of DC are included in the Base Unit, but only three are used specifically for the amplifiers applications:
Amplifier 1, Amplifier 2, Amplifier 3. AC amplifier. Power amplifier. Current amplifier. Two buffer amplifiers. Inverter amplifier. Two
circuits of differential amplifiers are supplied.
Signal Converters Circuits: Converter from Voltage to Current. Converter from Current to Voltage. Converter from Voltage to Frequency.
Converter of Frequency to Voltage (F/V). Full-Wave Rectifier. Phase rectifier. Phase shifter. Semiconductor detector of temperature.
Comparators, Generators, Oscillators and Filters: Comparator. Alarm oscillator. Electronic switch. Oscillator. Filters. Integrator. The
differentiator. Circuit “Sample and Hold”. Pulse generator. Pulse Receiver. PID Control. Power Control. Low Frequency Oscillator.
Current generator.
Others:Supply Sources of Direct Current (1A). Power source (4A). 4 Potentiometers of 1K, 5K, 10K and 20K.
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 490x450x470 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
2
Test Modules
BS1.Vibration and/or Deformation Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This Test Module has been designed to teach mechanical vibration and
displacement variable measurement techniques.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Extensiometric gauges:
Characteristics: Resistance at 24ºC: 120 W. Gauge factor at 24ºC:
2.120.
Heating resistance and thermocouple:
Resistance to produce temperature variations in the vibrant bar.
Thermocouple type “K”. Temperature range:-50ºC to 350ºC.
LVDT Sensor: Input Voltage range: 10 to 24VDC.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x300x350 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To measure the vibration of a vibrant girder using
extensiometric gauges.
2.- To use a heating resistance to rise the girder temperature
in order to study the effect on the sensors.(Thermocouple
and heating resistance).
3.- To detect the displacement of the BS1 system vibrant
girder using a LVDT sensor.
4.- Effect of temperature variation on an extensiometric
beam.
5.- Effect of deformation on the resistance of a beam.
6.- Measure of the three deformation dimensions or
deformation of spherical or cylindrical systems.
7.- Linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) for
measuring displacements.
8.- Analysis of how to compensate the variation of resistance
of a gauge due to temperature variations, using shorted
circuits with compensating gauges.
9.- Linear variable differential transformers (LVDT) as a
weighing system.
10.- Effect on the vibration of a beam with different masses.
BS2.Temperature Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The Temperature Test Module has been designed to teach the use and
applications of sensors of temperature as a measure, and its control.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Bimetallic switch sensor: Opening temperature: 50ºC. Closing
Temp.: 30ºC.
Adjustable bimetallic thermostat, with heater resistor:
Temperature range: 0ºC to 30ºC.
Relay AC: Voltage and current (nominal) :250V-10A. 3 sockets.
Switching voltage: 12 V.
Capillary thermostat: Temperature range: 0ºC-90ºC.
Thermocouples: 3 Cromel-Alumel thermocouples type K.
Temperature range: - 50ºC to 250ºC.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of
the Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x280x335 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- How to use the Curie effect as application of a high
temperature thermostatic controller.
2.- Adjustable bimetallic thermostat. To use the bimetallic
thermostat as a temperature control, calculating its
hysteresis.
3.- Adjustable bimetallic thermostat. How we can reduce the
hysteresis by adding a resistor to the heating circuit.
4.- To use the thermostat based on a bimetallic sensor to
control the temperature.
5.- Capillary thermostatic controller.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 19
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.3-Basic
Transducers
and Sensors
2.1Electronics
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.3- Transducers and Sensors
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
(continuation)
2
BS3.Pressure Test Module
(continuation)
Test Modules (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The Pressure Test Module has been designed to teach the use and
applications of this kind of sensors measurement systems. It shows the
different pressure measurement techniques.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Linear positioning sensor (Potentiometer).
Resistor range: 500 W to 5 KW. Operation force: 200-750g.
LVDT sensor: Sensibility: 780mV/mm. Power voltage: 10 to 24Vdc.
Differential pressure sensor: Measurement range: 0 to 30 psi.
Sensibility: 3.33mV/psi. Overpressure: 60 psi.
Extensiometric gauges: Nominal resistor @ 25ºC: 120 W. Gauge
factor: 2.00 to 2.1 typical.
Manometric pressure sensor: Measurement range: 0 a 30 psi.
Overpressure: 60 psi.
Absolute pressure sensor: Measurement range: 2 to 30 psi.
Overpressure: 60 psi.
Air Compressor: Air flow: 10 l /min. Pressure: 1.83Kg/cm2. Power
supply: 220V, 50/60Hz.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the Test
Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x270x320 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Use of linear positioning sensor (potentiometer) to detect
the displacement produced by a diaphragm expansion
caused by the air pressure.
2.- Use of a LVDT as an element to measure the diaphragm
distortion that is consequence of the pressure inside the
pressure chamber.
3.- Differential pressure sensor with hole-board system. Use
of a differential pressure sensor of the semiconductor
type to measure the pressure fall in a hole-board system.
4.- Extensiometric Gauges. To detect objects using an
infrared sensor by light beam interruption.
5.- Measure the pressure in the chamber, using two different
types of sensors (manometric and absolute pressure
sensor).
6.- Extensiometric gauges for measuring deformations: their
resistance changes as the diaphragm expands due to the
pressure coming from the pressure container.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS4.Flow Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The objective this module is to show techniques to measure
changeable fluids.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Flow optical sensor:
Power supply: 4.5 to 24 Vdc. Standard flow range: 0.5 to 5 GPM.
High resolution optical flow sensor: Measurement range: 0.25 to 6.5
l/min.
Underwater pump.
Level sensor by pressure: It is a differential pressure sensor. Pressure
range: 0 to 1psi. Overpressure: 20psi.
Differential pressure sensor (Hole board system): Measurement
range: 0 to 30 psi. Overpressure: 60 psi.
Changeable flow meter: Range:0 -2 l/min.
V narrowing.
Main and secondary tanks.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of
the Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x280x400 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To measure the water volume produced by an
underwater pump in the module using an optical flow
sensor.
2.- To use a high-resolution optical flow sensor to measure
low volumes.
3.- Level sensor by pressure. To use a differential pressure
sensor to measure the liquid level in one of the tanks.
4.- Differential pressure sensor. To measure the pressure-fall
in the module hole board system, as a necessary
parameter to determine volume.
5.- To measure the flow volume generated by the underwater
pump using a flow meter of changeable area.
6.- To obtain the flow-volume value in the secondary tank
using the V narrowing weir.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS5.Ovens Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
With “BS5” Test Module it is possible to study temperature
measurement techniques using several kinds of sensors placed
inside the sealed place that is used as oven.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Oven chamber.
Heating resistance: Maximum dissipation power of 500W.
Fan: Maximum power: 0.96 W. Maximum air flow: 2.5 l/s.
Thermocouples:
4 thermocouples placed inside the oven, each one of them at a
different height. Temperature range: -184 ºC to 400 ºC.
Platinum resistance thermometer:
Temperature range: -70ºC to 600ºC.
Thermistor:
NTC thermistor. Resistence at 25ºC: 5.8 KW. Temperature
range: -40ºC to 125ºC.
Semiconductor temperature sensor: Reverse polarized diode.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel
of the Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x300x470 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 20
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Heating resistance. Raise the oven internal temperature
over the environmental temperature using a heating
resistance to make tests and practices related with
temperature measurement.
2.- To use a fan as refrigerating element of the oven.
3.- To use thermocouples as temperature sensors elements
inside the oven. Temperature measurement using a
thermocouple.
4.- To measure temperature inside the oven using a platinum
resistance thermometer.
5.- To measure temperature inside the oven using a
thermistor temperature sensor.
6.- Temperature measurement using a thermistor, based on
its negative temperature coefficient.
7.- To obtain the temperature value inside the oven, using a
semiconductor sensor (diode).
8.- PID control.
(continuation)
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
(continuation)
2
BS6.Liquid Level Test Module
Test Modules (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The Liquid Level Test Module “BS6” has been designed to teach the
use and applications of level sensors and their measurement systems.
This module teaches techniques to measure and control the liquid
level in a tank.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Water tanks. 2 Minipumps: Power supply: 12Vdc (max. voltage).
Nominal current: 1 A DC.
Capacitative level sensor. Pressure level sensor, pressure range: 01psi. Level gauge changeable resistance with path end and beginning
switches. Conduction sensor. Magnetic float level sensor. Optical level
sensor.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x300x400 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To use a capacitative sensor to measure the liquid level in
the tank.
2.- To use the differential pressure sensor as an element to
determine the water level in a tank.
3.- To use a changeable resistance fixed to a float system as a
liquid level measurement element.
4.- Conduction Sensor. Use of a sensor made up of to steel
electrodes to measure the water level of a tank.
5.- Magnetic float level sensor. Detect a precise tank liquid
level with a magnetic switch sensor.
6.- Control the BS6 system left tank liquid level using an
optical level sensor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS7.Tachometers Test Module
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This module has been designed to teach linear and angular speed
measurement techniques.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Inductive Sensor: output voltage:
DC Motor: nominal voltage: 12V., resistance: 9,7 Oh., max. vacuum
speed: 8500 r.p.m., max. load speed: approx. 3500 r.p.m., start
voltage: 210mV. DC Tachometer.
Refractive Infrared Sensor. Hall Effect position sensor.
Slot Sensor: Slotted optical switch where an input LED and an output
phototransistor are capsulated.
Encoder.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 300x200x200 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1.- DC Motor. Provide the group of sensors of the BS7 system
fixed to the central axle of the equipment with movement
power.
2.- DC Tachometer. To use a DC motor as a tachometer to
measure the revolutions of the BS7 system central axle.
3.- Inductive Sensor.
4.- Refractive Infrared Sensor. To measure the central axle
revolutions of the BS7 system using a light reflection
optical sensor.
5.- To obtain the central axle speed value using a slotted
optical sensor through light interruption.
6.- To obtain the central axle speed value using a Hall-effect
position sensor.
7.- To measure the central axle revolutions of the BS7 system
using the encoder.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS8.Proximity Test Module
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This Module has been designed to teach techniques to detect the
proximity of objects, focusing on the distance at which each sensor is
able to detect the object and the type of material it can detect.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
DC Motor: Nominal power supply: 12Vdc.
Proximity capacitative sensor, detection distance: 10 mm.
Hall effect sensor.
Infrared sensor by reflection: Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter.
Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector.
Transmission infrared sensor: Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter.
Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector.
Conduction sensor. Inductive sensor: detection distance: 2mm.
Ultrasound sensor: transmitter sensibility: 106 dB., receiver sensibility:
65 dB., resonance frequency: 40kHz.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the
Test Module. Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x270x200 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1.- How to use a capacitative sensor to detect metal objects
as the pass in front of the sensor.
2.- To use a Hall effect sensor as an element to detect the
presence of magnetic objects.
3.- Reflection infrared sensor. To use an optical sensor that
works through infrared light reflection.
4.- Infrared sensor by transmission. To detect objects using
an infrared sensor by light beam interruption.
5.- Conduction sensor. To detect magnetic objects using a
REED switch sensor.
6.- To detect the presence of ferrous object using an inductive
sensor.
7.- Ultrasound sensor. To detect metallic and non-metallic
object using high frequency sounds.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS9.Pneumatic Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The Pneumatics Test Module “BS9” has been designed to teach
techniques of control and handling of a pneumatic piston.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Proportional valve 1 and 2: Nominal voltage: 24Vdc, pressure range:
8 bar max., 0 to 6 bar control. Pneumatic switch: max. pressure: 6
bars. Regulation filter: manual drainage, max. input pressure: 8 bars.
Differential pressure sensor: measurement range: 0 to 30 psi. LVDT
Sensor.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x270x200 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-
2.-
3.4.-
Proportional valves. To control electronically the vertical
displacement of a double effect pneumatic piston using
proportional valves.
Differential pressure sensor. To use a pressure sensor for
measuring the pressure difference between both
pneumatic piston air inlets.
Pneumatic switch. To deflect the air flow in the BS9 system
using a pneumatic switch.
LVDT Linear Displacement Sensor. To measure pneumatic
piston displacement using an excitation and DC output
LVDT.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 21
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.3-Basic
Transducers
and Sensors
2.1Electronics
issue:01/11
ELEMENTARY FLUID MECHANICS (20 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0813-810/20S
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 2
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIFLUBA
BASIC FLUIDS MECHANICS INTEGRATED
LABORATORY. FORMED BY:
1
1
FME00B
BASIC HYDRAULIC FEED SYSTEM
1
2
FME 03
BERNOULLI'S THEOREM
1
3
FME03/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
BERNOULLI'S THEOREM
20
4
FME03/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
BERNOULLI´S THEOREM (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
20
5
FME 05
ENERGY LOSS IN BENDS
1
6
FME05/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ENERGY LOSS IN BENDS
20
7
FME05/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR ENERGY
LOSS IN BENDS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
20
8
FME 08
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
1
9
FME08/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
20
10
FME08/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
20
11
FME 13
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP CHARACTERISTIC
1
12
FME13/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP CHARACTERISITCS
20
13
FME13/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP CHARACTERISTICS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
14
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
15
BDAS
BASIC DATA ADQUISITION SYSTEM AND SENSORS
FOR BEING USED WITH FME EDIBON SERIE,
FORMED BY:
ELECTRONIC BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
SPECIFIC SOFTWARE AND SENSORS FOR EACH FME
UNIT
1
IB
DAB
BDAS/SOF
1
1
4
16
0810PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
17
0810PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
18
0810IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
19
0810CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
20
0810TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
21
0810MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0813-810/20S
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 20 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
Modules
1
Base Service Units
2
FME00
Modules
(FME17)
(FME03)
(FME01)
(FME08)
(FME07)
(FME21)
or
FME00/B
(FME15)
(FME09)
(FME18)
(FME04)
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
(FME05)
(FME25)
INS/SOF. Instructor Software
(FME24)
+
(FME16)
(FME14)
(FME19)
FME../SOF.
Student/Module
Software
(FME13)
(FME10)
4
(FME11)
FME/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(FME27)
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Teaching
Technique
used
(FME20)
(FME06)
(FME22)
(FME26)
(FME12)
(FME23)
(FME02)
5
Other modules
BDAS. Basic Data Acquisition System and
sensors
Other modules
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Base Service Unit +
Module/s is the minimum supply)
Available Modules
-FME01. Impact of a Jet.
-FME12. Series/Parallel Pumps.
-FME23. Basic Pipe Network Unit.
-FME02. Flow over Weirs.
-FME13. Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics.
-FME03. Bernoulli’s Theorem Demonstration.
-FME14. Free and Forced Vortices.
-FME24. Unit for the study of Porous Beds
in Venturi Tubes (Darcy ’s
Equation).
-FME04. Orifice Discharge.
-FME15. Water Hammer.
-FME05. Energy Losses in Bends.
-FME16. Pelton Turbine.
-FME06. Osborne-Reynolds’ Demonstration.
-FME17. Orifice and Free Jet Flow.
-FME07. Energy Losses in Pipes.
-FME18. Flow Meter Demonstration.
-FME08. Hydrostatic Pressure.
-FME19. Cavitation Phenomenon Demonstration.
-FME09. Flow Visualization in Channels.
-FME20. Laminar Flow Demonstration.
-FME10. Dead Weight Calibrator.
-FME21. Radial Flow Turbine.
-FME11. Metacentric Height.
-FME22. Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation Unit.
-FME25. Flow Channel, 1m. length.
-FME26.
Depression Measurement System
(Vacuum gauge).
-FME27. Axial Flow Turbine.
-FME28. Francis Turbine.
-FME29. Kaplan Turbine.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 5
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
Laboratory structure
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Base Service Units
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
Every module needs being provided with water in order to run the experiment. There are two options:
FME00. Hydraulics Bench
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Mobile hydraulic bench, made in fibreglass reinforced
polyester, and mounted on wheels for mobility.
Centrifugal pump, 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.1-12.8
m., single phase 220V. / 50Hz or 110V./60Hz.
Runner made in stainless steel.
Sump tank capacity: 165 litres. Small channel: 8 litres.
Flow measurement: volumetric tank, gauged from 0 to 7
litres for low flow values and from 0 to 40 litres for high
flow values.
Control valve for regulating the flow.
Open channel to place the test module.
Measuring cylinder is provided for the measurement of
small flow rates.
Remote hand-operating dump valve in the base of the
volumetric tank.
Rapidity and ease interchanging of the different modules.
Dimensions (approx.): 1130 x 730 x 1000 mm.
Weight: 70Kg.
1.-Flow measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME00/B. Basic Hydraulic Feed System
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The FME00/B is a service unit for different Fluid
Mechanics Area units.
Centrifugal pump: 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.112.8m., single-phase 220V. / 50Hz. or 110V. / 60Hz.
Stainless steel impeller.
Tank capacity:140 litres approx.
Flowmeter. Membrane type flow adjusting valve.
Pump breaker starting. Safety differential switch.
Dimensions (approx.): 1000 x 600 x 700 mm.
Weight: 40Kg.
1.-Flow measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
2
Modules
Every module is a set of components that allows the realization of several experiments on Hydraulics. EDIBON offers 29 different models covering the most important topics
in the learning of Fluid Mechanics. Every Fluid Mechanics Module has its own manuals (8 manuals are normally supplied), that gives the theoretical background and
explains everything the student need to carry out the exercises/experiments.
Connectors, pipes and cables for completing the exercises and practices are supplied.
FME01. Impac of a jet
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Jet diameter: 8 mm.
Impact surfaces diameter: 40 mm.
Impact surfaces:
180° hemispherical surface.
120° curve surface.
90° flat surface.
A set of masses of 5, 10, 50 and 100 g. is supplied.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Dimensions (approx.): 250 x 250 x 500 mm.
Weight: 5Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Impact against a flat surface.
Impact against a curve surface of 120º.
Impact against a hemispherical surface.
Use of the fast connectors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME02. Flow over Weirs
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Dimensions of the weirs: 160x230x40mm.
Neckline angle in the V-shape weir: 90º.
Dimension of rectangular notch: 30x82mm.
Scale of the level meter: 0 to 160 mm.
Dimensions (approx.): 16 x 400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of the flow characteristics through a weir with a
rectangular neckline, made on a thin wall.
2.- Study of the flow characteristics through a weir with a Vshape neckline, made on a thin wall.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME03. Bernoulli’s Theorem Demonstration
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0 to 470 mm of water.
Number of manometer tubes: 8
Upstream diameter of the throat: 25 mm.
Narrowing:
Downstream: 21°.
Upstream: 10°.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 800 x450 x 700 mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 6
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the exact section in Venturi’s tube.
2.- Demonstration of Bernoulli’s Theorem. Divergentconvergent position.
3.- Determination of Bernoulli’s Theorem equation.
Convergent-divergent position.
4.- Observation of differences between convergent and
divergent position.
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Transparent cylindrical tank.
Five type of mouthpieces: diaphragm, colloidal, 2 of
Venturi and cylindrical.
Height of maximum load: 400 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 450 x 450 x 900 mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME05. Energy Losses in Bends
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Range of the two type Bourdon manometers: 0 to 2.5 bar.
Differential manometers range: 0 to 500 mm.
Number of manometric tubes: 12.
PVC Rigid pipes:
Internal dia.: 25 mm., external dia.:32 mm.
Flexible pipes:
Pressure taking-differential Manometer. External
dia.: 10 mm.
Pressurizing equipment. External diameter: 6 mm.
Drain. External diameter: 25 mm.
Fittings:
45º angle, 90º curve, 90º medium elbow, 90º
short elbow, 90º long elbow, broadening of
25/40, narrowing of 40/25.
Membrane valves, diameter 25 mm. Antireturn 6 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750x550x950 mm. Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, Venturi type.
2.- Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, Venturi type.
3.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, Venturi type.
4.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, diaphragm type.
5.- Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, diaphragm type.
6.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, diaphragm type.
7.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, colloidal type.
8.- Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, colloidal type.
9.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, colloidal type.
10.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, cylindrical type.
11.-Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, cylindrical type.
12.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, cylindrical type.
13.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, Venturi type.
14.-Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, Ventury type.
15.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, Ventury type.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Filling of the manometric tubes.
2.- Measurement of the flow.
3.- Measurement of load losses for a short elbow of 90º.
4.- Measurement of load losses for a middle elbow of 90º.
5.- Measurement of load losses for a curve of 90º.
6.- Measurement of load losses for a broadening of 25/40.
7.- Measurement of load losses for a narrowing 40/25.
8.- Measurement of load losses for an angle of 45º.
9.- Measurement of load losses for a membrane valve.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME06. Osborne- Reynolds Demonstration
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Tube inner diameter: 10 mm.
Tube outer diameter: 13 mm.
Visualization pipe length: 700 mm.
Capacity of the dye tank: 0.3 litres.
Tank capacity: 10 litres.
Flow control valve: diaphragm type.
The coloured fluid is regulated with a needle valve.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.):1250x450x450mm.Weight: 20Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Observation of the laminar, transition and turbulent
regime.
2.- Study of the velocity profile, reproducing the OsborneReynolds’s experiment.
3.- Reynolds’s number calculation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME07. Energy Losses in Pipes
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Test pipe of 4 mm. of inner diameter, 6 mm. of external
diameter and 500 mm. of length.
1 differential manometer of water column.
Manometer scale: 0 to 500 mm (water).
2 Bourdon type manometers, range: 0 to 2 bar.
Tank of constant height.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 330 x 330 x 900 mm.
Weight: 30Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 7
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Energy loss in pipes for a turbulent regimen.
2.- Determination of the energy loss in a turbulent regimen.
3.- Determination of the number of Reynolds for a turbulent
regimen.
4.- Energy loss in pipes for a laminar regimen.
5.- Determination of the energy loss factor f for a pipe in
laminar regimen.
6.- Determination of Reynolds number for the laminar regimen.
7.- Determination of the kinematic viscosity of water.
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
FME04. Orifice Discharge
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
FME08. Hydrostatic Pressure
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Tank capacity: 5.5 l.
Distance between suspended masses and the support
point: 285 mm.
Area of the section: 0.007 m².
Total depth of submerged quadrant: 160 mm.
Height of support point on the quadrant: 100 mm.
A set of masses of different weights is supplied (4 of 100
gr., 1 of 50 gr., 5 of 10 gr. and 1 of 5 gr.).
Dimensions (approx.): 550 x 250 x 350 mm. Weight:5Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME09. Flow Visualization in Channels
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Capacity of the dye tank: 0.3 litres.
Width/length of channel approx.: 15/630 mm. Depth of
channel approx.: 150 mm.
Damping tank.
Hydrodynamic models: 2 lengthened, 2 circular of 25
and 50 mm. dia., rectangle with rounded edges, wedge.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 900 x 450 x 500 mm.
Weight: 7Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the center of pressures with an angle of
90°, partially submerged.
2.- Determination of the resultant force with an angle of 90°,
partially submerged.
3.- Determination of the center of pressures, angle <> 90°
partially submerged.
4.- Determination of the equivalent force with an angle
<>90° partially submerged.
5.- Determination of the center of pressures with an angle of
90° totally submerged.
6.- Determination of the resultant force with an angle of 90°
totally submerged.
7.- Determination of the center of pressures, <>90° totally
submerged.
8.- Determination of the resultant force, angle <>90° totally
submerged.
9.- Balance of momentum.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Leakage of liquids by thin-wall weirs.
2.- Liquid leakage by thick-wall weirs.
3.- Models with wing profile submerged in a fluid current.
Aerodynamics.
4.- Circular models submerged in a fluid current.
Aerodynamics.
5.- Demonstration of the phenomenon associated to the flow
in open channels.
6.- Visualization of the flow lines around different submerged
hydrodynamic models.
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME10. Dead Weight Calibrator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Pressure manometer: Bourdon type. 0 - 2.5 bar.
Masses (approx. weights): 0.5 kg. 1.0 kg. 2.5 kg. 5 kg.
Piston diameter: 18 mm. Piston weight: 0.5 kg.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 4Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Bourdon type manometer calibration.
2.- Hysteresis curve determination.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME11. Metacentric Height
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Maximum angle: +/- 13°.
Corresponding lineal dimension: +/- 90 mm.
Dimension of the float:
Length: 353 mm. Width: 204 mm. Total height:475 mm.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 5Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of the stability of a floating body. Angular
displacements.
2.- Study of the stability of a floating body. Different positions of
the center of gravity.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME 12. Series/Parallel Pumps
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Centrifugal pump: 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.112.8m., single- phase, 220V./50Hz or 110V./60 Hz.
Absolute pressure manometer at the pump admission,
range - 1 to 3 bar.
2 manometers placed one of them in the discharge and
the another one in the discharge accessory, range: 0 - 4
bar. Membrane valve for flow regulating. Two way valve:
2 positions: open or close.
Accessories: two flexible pipes with quick connections,
reinforced pipe with quick connections. Discharge
accessory.Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions of FME12(approx.): 500x400x400 mm.
approx.
Dimensions of discharge accessory: 500 x400 x250mm.
approx.
Weight: 30Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-H(Q) curve obtaining of a centrifugal pump.
2.-Series coupling of two pumps with the same characteristics.
3.-Parallel coupling of two pumps with the same
characteristics.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME13. Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Centrifugal pump: 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.112.8m. Speed variator.
Discharge accessory.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 450 x 500 x1250 mm.
Weight: 70Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 8
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Obtaining of the curves H(Q), N(Q), Eff%(Q) of a
centrifugal pump.
2.- Making of the map of a centrifugal pump.
3.- Representation of the adimensional curves H*, N* and
rpm*.
4.- Series coupling of two pumps of similar characteristics.
5.- Series coupling of two pumps of different characteristics.
6.- Parallel coupling of two pumps of similar characteristics.
7.- Parallel coupling of two pumps of different characteristics.
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
FME14. Free and Forced Vortices
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Tank diameter: 300 mm.
Tank height: 300 mm.
Mouthpieces orifice diameters: 8, 16 and 24 mm.
Distance between centers: 0, 30, 50, 70, 90 and 110mm.
Pitot tube with measuring points at: 15, 20, 25 and 30mm
radius and a scale.
Measurement bridge.
Inlet pipes: 9 and 12.5 mm. diameter.
Diameter measurement system by Nonius.
Blind mouthpiece with X-shaped crosses.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 600x550x1400mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of forced vortex without discharge orifice.
2.- Study of forced vortex with discharge orifice.
3.- Study of the free vortex.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME15. Water Hammer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Constant level deposit, in methacrylate.
Unload deposit, in methacrylate.
Pipe circuits in PVC.
Valves to select the circuit.
2 adjustable equilibrium chimneys and subjection clips.
Connections to the Hydraulics Bench (FME00) or Basic
Hydraulic Feed System (FME00/B) with fast plugs.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx).:1215x270x1430mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Subduing of the water hammer effects.
2.- Study of the subduing in function of the diameter of the
chimney.
3.- Calculations of the energy losses in pipes.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME16. Pelton Turbine
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Speed range: 0 - 2000 r.p.m. Torque: 10 W.
Manometer range: 0 - 2.5 bar.
Number of buckets: 16.
Drum radius: 30 mm.
Dynamometers range: 0 - 20 N.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.):750x400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the operative characteristics of Pelton’s
Turbine.
2.- Determination of the operation mechanical curves.
3.- Determination of the operation hydraulic curves.
4.- Adimensionalization.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME17. Orifice & Free Jet Flow
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Orifices with diameters of 3.5 and 6 mm.
Jet trajectory Probes: 8.
Maximum height: 500 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.):600x550x1400mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the orifice velocity coefficient.
2.- Obtaining of the orifice discharge coefficient in permanent
regime.
3.- Obtaining of the orifice discharge coefficient in variable
regime.
4.- Obtaining of the tank discharge time.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME18. Flow Meter Demonstration
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0 to 500 mm of water column.
Number of manometric tubes: 8
Orifice plate diameter: 25 mm.
Flowmeter: 2 to 30 l/min.
Venturi dimensions:
Throat diameter: 20 mm. Upstream pipe diameter:
32 mm. Downstream taper: 21°.
Upstream taper: 14°.
Orifice Plate dimensions:
Upstream pipe diameter: 35 mm.
Downstream orifice diameter: 19 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 450 x 950 mm. Weight: 5Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 9
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Filling of the manometric tubes.
2.- Determination of the error in flow measurements using the
Venturi.
3.- Determination of the Cd factor in the Venturi.
4.- Determination of the strangulation in the Venturi.
5.- Determination of the error in flow measurements using the
orifice plate.
6.- Determination of the Cd factor in the orifice plate.
7.- Determination of the effective area in an orifice plate.
8.- Comparison of the energy loss in the three different
elements.
9.- Comparison among the Venturi, orifice plate and
flowmeter.
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
FME19. Cavitation Phenomenon Demonstration
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0 to 2.5 bar.
Vacuum gauge range: from-1 to 0 bar.
Throat section: 36 mm².
Normal section: 150 mm².
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 400 x 750 mm. Weight:5Kg.
1.- Study of cavitation.
2.- Visualization of the cavitation phenomenon with forced
conduction.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME20. Laminar Flow Demonstration
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Capacity of dye tank: 0.3 litres.
Width/length of the table: 400/210 mm.
Depth of the table: adjustable depending on the models.
Hydrodynamic models:
Two circular ones of 25 and 50 mm. diameter.
Two rectangular ones of 25x25 and 50x50 mm.
Wedge.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 870x450 x 400 mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.-
Ideal flow around a submerged cylinder.
Ideal flow around a submerged profile.
Ideal flow around a body in peak.
Ideal flow in a convergent channel.
Ideal flow in a divergent channel.
Ideal flow in an elbow of 90º.
Ideal flow in a sudden contraction.
Ideal flow in a sudden broadening.
Substitution of a line of current for a solid edge.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME21. Radial Flow Turbine
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Nozzles:
inlet diameter: 21 mm., outlet diameter: 2.0 mm.,
discharge angle: 180º.
Turbine rotor:
external diameter:69 mm., internal diameter:40 mm.,
number of nozzles: 2., inlet angle to the nozzle: 180º.,
outlet angle to the nozzle: 180.º, used material:
aluminium.
Brake:
pulley diameter:60 mm., Effective diameter: 50 mm.
Water pump:
maximum pressure: 2.5 bar, maximum water flow: 80
l./min., electrical power: single-phase 220 V.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 800x900x 800 mm.
Weight: 50Kg.
1.2.3.4.-
Flow calculation.
Obtaining of the M (n, Ha ), N(n, Ha ), h (n, Ha ) curves.
Obtaining of the M (n, Q), Nm(n, Q), h (n, Q) curves.
Adimensionalization.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME22. Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer (type Bourdon), range: 0-2.5 bar.
Manometer(type Bourdon), range: 0-(-1) bar.
2 tanks, height: 135 mm and internal diameter: 64 mm.
Venturi tube with 6 tappings (Divergent/Convergent).
Differential manometers: 0-500mm.
5 manometric tubes.
Quick connection system incorporated.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750x400x850 mm. Weight:10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- How to fill the manometric tubes.
2.- Flow calculation.
3.- Determination of the exact section in Venturi’s tube.
Bernoulli’s theorem study.
4.- Cavitation study.
5.- Pressure reduction in a tank.
6.- Aspiration pump.
7.- Aspiration pump for mixing two liquids.
8.- Using for air and water mixing.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME23. Basic Pipe Network Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminum structure where the pipe network is
located and the subjection panel of the manometers.
Pipe network. This pipe network has been mounted with 4
pipes, each one with a valve to let the flow of water run
through the corresponding pipe.
Test pipes: two 20mm wide PVC pipes, one 16mm wide
PVC pipe and one 10mm wide methacrylate pipe.
8 eight pressure intakes, connected to a manometric
tubes panel of pressurized water.
The pressurization in made by a manual pump.
Manometric tubes panel: number of manometric tubes:
8, range: 0 to 470 mm of water.
Inlet pipe. Outlet pipe. Regulation valve for controlling
the flow through the network.
Adjustable legs for leveling the unit.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Dimensions (approx.): 600x350x800mm. Weight: 50Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 10
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Some practical possibilities:
1.- Load loss in a PVC pipe .
2.- Load loss in a methacrylate pipe.
.
3.- Study of the load loss in pipes made of the same material.
4.- Study of the load loss in function of the material.
5.- Friction coefficient in a PVC pipe.
6.- Friction coefficient in a methacrylate pipe.
7.- Study of the friction coefficient in function of the material.
8.- Study of the friction coefficient in function of the diameter.
9.- Configuration of network in parallel for pipes of the
same material and different diameter.
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
FME24. Unit for the study of Porous Beds in Venturi Tubes (Darcy’s Equation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0-300 mm. water.
Number of manometric tubes: 8.
Strangulation diameter upstream: 25 mm.
Narrowing: upstream: 10º, downstream: 21º.
Venturi’s tube with Pitot tube.
Venturi’s tube with porous bed of a grain diameter of 1.0
to 1.5 mm (FME24/A).
Venturi’s tube with porous bed of a grain diameter of 2.5
to 3.5 mm (FME24/B).
Venturi’s tube with porous bed of a grain diameter of 5.5
to 7.0 mm (FME24/C).
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 800x450x700 mm. Weight: 15Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Demonstration of Bernoulli’s theorem and its limitations in
divergent - convergent position.
2.- Demonstration of Bernoulli’s theorem and its limitations in
convergent-divergent position.
3.- Direct measurement of the static height and total
distribution of heights in Venturi’s tubes.
4.- Determination of the exact section in a Venturi’s tube.
5.- Head losses in the porous bed (elements FME24/A,
FME24/B and FME24/C).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME25. Flow Channel, 1m. length
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Channel of rectangular section with transparent walls in
methacrylate, section: 80 mm., length: 1 m.
Rigid and flexible pipes. Regulating valves.
Storage tank. Tank with soothing of flow.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.):1500x500x500mm.Weight:40 Kg
Available accessories:
FME25TP. Pitot tube.
FME25CV. Vertical plane gate.
FME25SDL. Syphon.
FME25RMC.Markings for measurement of the water
height.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Some practical possibilities:
1.- To study and demonstrate the properties of fluids in open
channels.
2.- Measurement of water height and velocity along the
channel.
3.- Flow control by floodgates.
4.- Level control using syphons.
5.- Calculation of water flow.
Other possible practices:
6.- Filling of the Pitot tube.
7.- Use of markings for measuring the water height.
FME26. Depression Measurement System (vacuum gauge).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure.
Pressure-vacuum gauge adjusted from -1 to 0 bar.
Quick connections.
Dimensions (approx.): 220 x110 x 42 0 mm. Weight: 2Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME27. Axial Flow Turbine
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Nozzle:
inlet dia. of the throat: 2.5 mm., outlet dia. of the
throat: 2.5 mm., discharge angle: 20º and 30º.
Turbine Rotor:
external dia.:53 mm., internal dia.: 45 mm., number
of blades: 40, inlet angle of the blades: 40º, outlet
angle of the blades: 40º, used material: brass.
Brake:
pulley diameter: 60 mm., real diameter: 50 mm.
Water Pump:
maximum pressure: 2.5 bar, maximum water flow: 80
l./min., electrical power: single-phase,220 V.
Bourdon type manometer.
8 ball valves.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 800x900x800 mm. Weight: 50Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-To measure the depression caused for the fluid aspiration by
an hydraulic pump.
2.-We can observe the different negative readings due to the
different methods of fluid aspiration for its subsequent
impulsion.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Flow calculation.
2.- Determination of the discharge coefficient of the nozzle.
3.- Determination of the curve N(Q,n), Pm(Q, n) and h(Q, n),
(20º nozzle).
4.- Determination of the curve N(Q,n), Pm(Q, n) and h(Q, n);
(30º nozzle).
5.- A dimensional analysis.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME28. Francis Turbine
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Functional model of Francis turbine.
Turbine operating area with transparent cover.
Load indication for braking device using spring balances
10N.
Mounted on base plate.
Turbine: power output aprox.: 2.8W.
Impeller: external diameter 50mm,width of vanes 5mm, 7
vanes.
Guide vanes: 6 off, adjustable.
Manometer.
Easy and quick coupling system.
Anodized aluminium structure built-in.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 700x400x700 mm. Weight: 20Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the typical turbine curves.
2.- Turbine power output versus speed and flow rate at
various heads.
3.- Effect of guide vane setting on turbine performance.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 11
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
FME29. Kaplan Turbine
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Functional model of Kaplan Turbine.
Turbine operating area with transparent cover.
Load indication for braking device using spring balances
10N.
Mounted on base plate.
Turbine: power output approx. 5 W.
Six adjustable guide vanes.
Guide rotary blades.
Manometer.
Easy and quick coupling system.
Anodized aluminium structure built-in.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 700x400x700 mm. Weight: 20Kg.
1.- Determination of the operative characteristics of Kaplan
Turbine.
2.- Flow calculation.
3.- Determination of the operation mechanical curves.
4.- Determination of the operation hydraulic curves.
5.- Adimensional analysis.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Software
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software (FME../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment with is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
information on the subject of study.
+
Module
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
FME../SOF Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory
has been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the lab exercises and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
- FME01/SOF. Impact of a Jet.
- FME02/SOF. Flow over Weirs.
- FME03/SOF. Bernoulli’s Theorem
Demonstration.
- FME04/SOF. Orifice Discharge.
- FME05/SOF. Energy Losses in Bends.
- FME06/SOF. Osborne-Reynolds
Demonstration.
- FME07/SOF. Energy Losses in Pipes.
- FME08/SOF. Hydrostatic Pressure.
- FME09/SOF. Flow Visualization in Channels.
- FME10/SOF. Dead Weight Calibrator.
- FME11/SOF. Metacentric Height.
- FME12/SOF.
- FME13/SOF.
- FME14/SOF.
- FME15/SOF.
- FME16/SOF.
- FME17/SOF.
- FME18/SOF.
- FME19/SOF.
- FME20/SOF.
- FME21/SOF.
- FME22/SOF.
- FME23/SOF.
Series/Parallel Pumps.
Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics.
Free and Forced Vortices.
Water Hammer.
Pelton Turbine.
Orifice and Free Jet Flow.
Flow Meter Demonstration.
Cavitation Phenomenon
Demonstration.
Laminar Flow Demonstration.
Radial Flow Unit.
Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation Unit.
Basic Pipe Network Unit.
- FME24/SOF. Unit for the Study of Porous Beds in
Venturi Tubes (Darcy’s Equation).
- FME25/SOF. Flow Channel, 1m. length.
- FME26/SOF. Depression Measurement System.
- FME27/SOF. Axial Flow Turbine.
- FME28/SOF. Francis Turbine.
- FME29/SOF. Kaplan Turbine.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 12
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
4
FME/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basis Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single
click CAL will perform the calculations.
Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It provides a handy option to avoid using different
reference sources while in progress. For example: the
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right
names, conversion factors...
...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
tables.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
Available Software Packages:
- FME01/CAL.
- FME02/CAL.
- FME03/CAL.
- FME04/CAL.
- FME05/CAL.
- FME06/CAL.
- FME07/CAL.
- FME08/CAL.
- FME09/CAL.
- FME10/CAL.
- FME11/CAL.
- FME12/CAL.
Impact of a Jet.
Flow over Weirs.
Bernoulli’s Theorem Demonstration.
Orifice Discharge.
Energy Losses in Bends.
Osborne-Reynolds Demonstration.
Energy Losses in Pipes.
Hydrostatic Pressure.
Flow Visualization in Channels.
Dead Weight Calibrator.
Metacentric Height.
Series/Parallel Pumps.
- FME13/CAL.
- FME14/CAL.
- FME15/CAL.
- FME16/CAL.
- FME17/CAL.
- FME18/CAL.
- FME19/CAL.
Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics.
Free and Forced Vortices.
Water Hammer.
Pelton Turbine.
Orifice and Free Jet Flow.
Flow Meter Demonstration.
Cavitation Phenomenon
Demonstration.
- FME20/CAL. Laminar Flow Demonstration.
- FME21/CAL. Radial Flow Turbine.
- FME22/CAL. Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation
Unit.
5
- FME23/CAL. Basic Pipe Network Unit.
- FME24/CAL. Unit for the Study of Porous Beds
in Venturi Tubes (Darcy’s Equation).
- FME25/CAL. Flow Channel, 1m. length.
- FME26/CAL. Depression Measurement System.
- FME27/CAL. Axial Flow Turbine.
- FME28/CAL. Francis Turbine.
- FME29/CAL. Kaplan Turbine.
BDAS. Basic Data Acquisition Systems and sensors
For being used with modules type ”FME”.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 13
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
Software (continuation)
issue:01/11
HEAT TRANSFER MODULE (20 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0950/20S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
TSTCC
TSTCC/CIB
DAB
TSTCC/CCSOF
TXC/CL
TXC/CR
TXC/RC
TXC/CC
TXC/SE
TXC/ER
TXC/EI
TXC/LG
TXC/FF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROL HEAT TRANSFER SERIES,
FORMED BY:
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR HEAT TRANSFER
SERIES
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR HEAT TRANSFER SERIES
LINEAR HEAT CONDUCTION MODULE
RADIAL HEAT CONDUCTION MODULE
RADIATION HEAT CONDUCTION MODULE
COMBINED FREE AND FORCE CONVECTION AND
RADIATION MODULE
EXTENDED SURFACE HEAT TRANSFER MODULE
RADIATION ERRORS IN TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
MODULE
UNSTEADY STATE HEAT TRASNFER MODULE
THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF LIQUID AND GAS
MODULE
FREE AND FORCED CONVECTION HEAT TRANSFER
MODULE
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
TSTCC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR HEAT
TRANSFER(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
FOR MODULES: TXC/CL, TXC/CR, TXC/RC,
TXC/CC, TXC/SE, TXC/ER. TXC/EI, TXC/LG,
TXC/FF. TXC/TE. TXC/MM, TXC/TC AND TXC/TI
20
3
TSTCC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
HEAT TRANSFER SERIES
20
4
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
5
0950PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
0950PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
0950IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
8
0950CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
0950TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
0950MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
10
Ref: 0950/20S
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 20 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
9.8- Heat Transfer (Basic)
TSTCC. Computer Controlled Heat Transfer Series:
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
Control
Interface Box
1.1
TXC/CL. Linear Heat
Conduction Module (
1.4
1.6
1.2
TXC/CC. Combined Free and Forced
Convection and Radiation Module (
TXC/ER. Radiation Errors in
Temperature Measurement
Module ( )
1.10
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Available Modules
)
1.7
TXC/CR. Radial Heat
Conduction Module (
1.11
1.3 TXC/RC.
Radiation Heat
Conduction Module ( )
)
1.5
)
TXC/EI. Unsteady State Heat
Transfer Module ( )
TXC/TE. 3 Axis Heat Transfer
Module ( )
( )
Computer Control
Software for each
Module
1.8
TXC/SE. Extended Surface
Heat Transfer Module ( )
TXC/LG. Thermal Conductivity
of Liquids and Gases Module (
TXC/MM. Metal to Metal Heat
Transfer Module ( )
1.12
1.9
)
TXC/FF. Free and Forced Convection
Heat Transfer Module ( )
TXC/TC. Ceramic Heat
Transfer Module ( )
1.13
TXC/TI. Isolated Material Heat
Transfer Module ( )
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
1 Available Modules
TXC/CL. Linear Heat Conduction Module:
Anodized aluminium structure.Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the
real unit.
Lineal conduction module consist on :input heat section, electric heater with controller circuit.
Temperature sensors.
Refrigeration section with a surface cooled by water and 4 Temperature sensors.
Central section: with brass of 25 mm of diameter and brass of 10 mm of diameter, with stainless steel of
25 mm of diameter; 3 Temperature sensors. Digital wattmeter of 0 to 120 W.
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module:
(#)Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of
data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the
alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
Dimensions (approx.): 300 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.2 TXC/CR. Radial Heat Conduction Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Brass disk of 110 mm of diameter and 3 mm of thickness. Electric heater. Peripherical cooling tube. 6
Temperature sensors distanced 10 mm.
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module.(#)
Dimensions (approx.):300 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.3 TXC/RC. Radiation Heat Conduction Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
This unit consists on a metal plate with a resistance at one side and a lamp in the another side. Lengthwise
of the metal plate you can place the elements supplied with the unit. Resistance that allows to heat and to
study the radiation. The unit is provided with accessories for light experiments and radiation experiments.
Light accessories: luxometer, filters, filters porthole.
Radiation accessories: radiometer, planes surfaces. There are elements for studding the radiation and
each one contains one temperature sensor: polished aluminium, anodized aluminium, brass. 2 Black
body. Variable slit or aperture. It allows to regulate the area of the radiation. 6 Temperature sensors.
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals:
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software this Module .(#)
Dimensions (approx.) : 1400 x 820 x 900 mm. Weight: 40 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.1
Continue...
Non computer controlled version available.
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1
Data
Acquisition
Board
Page 47
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Practices to be done with the Linear Heat Conduction
Module (TXC/CL):
1.- Conduction in a simple bar.
2.- Determination of the thermal conductivity “k”.
3.- Conduction through a compound bar.
4.- Determination of the thermal conductivity “k”, of the
stainless steel.
5.- Determination of the thermal contact resistance Rtc.
6.- Effect of the crossing sectional area.
7.- Insulation effect.
8.- Temperature sensors calibration.
9-27 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Radial Heat Conduction
Module (TXC/CR):
28.- Radial conduction.
29.- Calibration of the temperature sensors.
30.- Determination of the thermal conductivity “k”.
31.- Determination of the thermal contact resistance Rtc.
32.- Effect of the crossing sectional area.
33.- Insulation effect.
34-52 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Radiation Heat Conduction
Module (TXC/RC):
53.- Inverse of the distant square law for the radiation.
54.- Stefan-Boltzman´s law.
55.- Emission power I.
56.- Emission power II.
57.- Kirchhorff´s law.
58.- Area factors.
59.- Inverse of the distant square law for the light.
60.- A´lamberts cosine´s law.
61.- A´lamberts absorption´s law.
62-80 .- Practices with PLC.
Continue...
www.edibon.com
9.8- Heat Transfer (Basic)
(continuation)
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY (continuation)
Available Modules (continuation)
TXC/CC. Combined Free and Forced Convection and Radiation Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Centrifugal fan of
2650 rpm, max. flow: 1200l/min and air max. velocity around 5 m/s. Stainless steel conduct with interior
cover, formed by: temperature sensor, in order to measure the temperature of inlet air; anemometer for
measuring the air flow (natural convection), differential pressure sensor for measuring the air flow (forced
convection) and temperature sensor in order to measure the temperature of outlet floodgate.
Heater: copper cylinder with exterior cover: interior resistance of 150W., temperature sensor for
measuring the temperature of the cylinder. Temperature sensor. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module .(#)
Dimensions (approx.): 430 x 350 x 1300 mm. Weight: 50 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.5 TXC/SE. Extended Surface Heat Transfer Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 300 W Resistance,
embedded in a copper capsule to permit a good contact with the interchangeable fins. The copper
capsule is isolated by a coat of Teflon. The power to the resistance is controlled from the computer control
software by a 0-10 Volts signal. 11 Temperature sensors. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software this Module .(#)
Dimensions (approx.): 600 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.6 TXC/ER. Radiation Errors in Temperature Measurement Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Centrifugal fan of
2650 rpm, max. flow 1200l/min and air max. velocity around 5 m/s. Stainless steel conduct with interior
cover, formed by: temperature sensor, in order to measure the temperature of inlet air; flow sensor,
temperature sensor, in order to measure the temperature of outlet floodgate. Copper cylinder with
exterior cover: interior resistance of 150W. temperature sensor for measuring the temperature of the
cylinder. 5 Temperature sensors. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module .(#)
Dimensions (approx.): 430 x 350 x 1300 mm. Weight: 50 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.7 TXC/EI . Unsteady State Heat Transfer Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Water tank. Different
shapes of various materials are studied. Heating element (3000 W). The high power allows reaching the
steady state faster. Water pump with variable speed is controlled by an inverter, maximum flow of 4 l./min.
3 Temperature sensors allow controlling the stability of the temperature of the water bath. Flow sensor. 2
Temperature sensors. The first one permits to record the evolution of the temperature of the shape at its
center. The second one, works as a stop watch, it will indicate the precise moment in which the shape is
submerged. Level indicator. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module .(#)
Dimensions (approx.):600 x 600 x 750 mm. Weight: 60 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.8 TXC/LG. Thermal Conductivity of Liquids and Gases Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Aluminium body with
brass jacket. Resistance. Valves. 5 Temperature sensors. Syringe. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module .(#)
Dimensions (approx.): 300 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.9 TXC/FF. Free and Forced Convection Heat Transfer Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Stainless steel tunnel.
Methacrylate viewer that allows a good visualization of the exchanger in use. Variable speed fan.
Heating resistance. Flow sensor. 9 Temperature sensors. 3 Exchanger: flat heat exchanger, dowels heat
exchanger, blade heat exchanger. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module.(#)
Dimensions: 370 x 610 x 920 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.10 TXC/TE. 3 Axis Heat Transfer Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 3 Axis conduction
module. Electric heater. 8 Temperature sensors. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module.(#)
Dimensions: 300 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.11 TXC/MM. Metal to Metal Heat Transfer Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Electric heater. 6
Temperature sensors. Materials to test: copper, brass, stainless steel, aluminium (to choose).
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module .(#)
Dimensions: 300 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.12 TXC/TC. Ceramic Heat Transfer Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Electric heater. 6
Temperature sensors. Suitable for ceramic materials. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module .(#)
Dimensions (approx.): 300 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.13 TXC/TI. Isolated Material Heat Transfer Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Electric heater. 8
Temperature sensors. Suitable for fibrous, granular and sheet materials. Suitable for homogeneous and
non-homogeneous materials. Suitable for soft, semi-rigid and rigid materials.
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module.(#)
Dimensions (approx.): 300 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
Items Common for the Modules type “TXC”
2 TSTCC/CIB. Control Interface Box:
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled.
Simultaneous visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all
sensors involved in the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed
at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the PID parameters, at any moment
during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of parameters
involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third
one in the control software.
Dimensions (approx.): 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
Practices to be done with the Combined Free and
Forced Convection and Radiation Module(TXC/CC):
81.- Control System: Temperature sensors calibration.
82.- Control System: Air flow sensor calibration.
83.- Demonstration of the combined transmission effect of
the radiation and convection on the surface of the
cylinder. Determination of the combined transmission
effect of heating by forced convection an radiation.
84.- Demonstration of the influence of air flow in the
heating transfer. Determination of the combined
transmission effect of heating by forced convection
and radiation.
85.- Demonstration of the influence of input power in the
heating transfer. Determination of the combined
transmission effect of heating by forced convection
and radiation.
86.- Demonstration of the combined transmission effect of
the radiation and convection on the surface of the
cylinder. Determination of the combined transmission
effect of heating by free convection and radiation.
87.- Determination of the airflow.
88-106 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Extended Surface Heat
Transfer Module(TXC/SE):
107.-Heat transfer from a Fin.
108.-Effect of cross section shape in heat transfer from a Fin
109.-Heat transfer from Fins of two different materials.
110-128 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Radiation Errors in
Temperature Measurement Module (TXC/ER):
129.-Radiation errors in temperature measurement.
130.-Control System: Temperature sensors calibration.
131.-Control System: Temperature air flow sensors
calibration.
132-150 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Unsteady State Heat
Transfer Module(TXC/EI):
151.-Predicting temperature at the center of a cylinder
using transient conduction with convection.
152.-Predicting the conductivity of a similar shape
constructed from a different material.
153.-Conductivity and temperature dependence on
volume.
154.-Conductivity and temperature dependence on
surrounding temperature T¥ .
155-173 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Thermal Conductivity of
Liquids and Gases Module (TXC/LG):
174.- Control System: Temperature sensors calibration.
175.- Unit calibration.
176.- Obtaining of the curve of thermal conductivity of the
air.
177.-Determination of thermal conductivity in vacuum.
178.- Determination of water thermal conductivity.
179.- Thermal conductivity determination of a mineral oil.
180-198 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Free and Forced
Convection Heat Transfer Module (TXC/FF):
199.-Free convection in flat surfaces.
200.-Forced convection in flat surfaces.
201.-Dependence of the heat transmission with the
temperature.
202.-Dependence of the heat transmission with the speed
of the fluid.
203.-Dependence of the heat transmission with the
exchanger geometry.
204.-Temperature distribution in the additional surfaces.
205-223 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the 3 Axis Heat Transfer
Module (TXC/TE):
224.-Calibration processes.
225.-Temperature sensors calibration.
226.-Determination of the thermal conductivity “k”,
through 3 axis.
227-245 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Metal to Metal Heat
Transfer Module (TXC/MM):
246.-Calibration processes.
247.-Temperature sensors calibration.
248.-Determination of the thermal conductivity “k”.
249.- Insulation effect.
250.-Determination of the thermal contact resistance.
251-269.- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Ceramic Heat Transfer
Module (TXC/TC):
270.-Calibration processes.
271.-Temperature sensors calibration.
272.-Determination of the thermal conductivity “k”.
273.-Calculation of the heat transfer properties of
specimens.
274-292 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Isolated Material Heat
Transfer Module (TXC/TI):
293.- Calibration processes.
294.-Temperature sensors calibration.
295.-Determination of the thermal conductivity “k”.
296.-Calculation of the heat transfer properties of
specimens.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/ 297-315 .- Practices with PLC.
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1.4
heattransferbasic/TSTCC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 48
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0950/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
TSTCC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR HEAT TRANSFER
SERIES
1
1
2
0950PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
0950PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
0950IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
5
0950CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
0950TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
0950MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
HEAT EXCHANGE MODULE (20 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0953/20S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
TICC
TIUS
TICC/CIB
DAB
TICC/CCSOF
TITC
TIPL
TIVE
TIVS
TIFT
TITCA
TIPLA
TICF
DESCRIPTION
HEAT EXCHANGERS TRAINING SYSTEMS, COMPUTER
CONTROLLED, FORMED BY:
SERVICE UNIT FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS TRAINING
SYSTEM
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR HEAT EXCHANGER
TRAINING SYSTEM
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR HEAT EXCHANGER
TRAINING SYSTEM
CONCENTRIC TUBE HEAT EXCHANGER
PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER
JACKETED VESSEL HEAT EXCHANGER
COIL VESSEL HEAT EXCHANGER
TURBULENT FLOW HEAT EXCHANGER
EXTENDED TUBULAR HEAT EXCHANGER
EXTENDED RECONFIGURABLE PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER
CROSS FLOW HEAT EXCHANGER
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
TICC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR HEAT
EXCHANGERS TRAINING SYSTEM (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS) FOR THE HEAT
EXCHANGERS: CONCRENTIC TUBE, PLATE,
JACKETED VESSEL, COIL VESSEL AND TURBULENT
FLOW.
20
3
TICC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
HEAT EXCHANGERS TRAINING SYSTEMS
20
4
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
5
0953PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
0953PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
0953IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
8
0953CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
0953TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
0953MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
10
Ref: 0953/20S
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 20 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
9.7- Heat Exchange
TICC. Computer Controlled Heat Exchangers Training System:
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
Heat Exchangers available to be used with
the Base Service Unit:
4.2
4.1
( )
3
Computer Control
Data
Acquisition Software for each
Heat Exchanger
Board
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
TIPL. Plate Heat Exchanger ( )
4.3
TICT. Shell & Tube Heat Exchanger ( )
TITC. Concentric Tube
Heat Exchanger ( )
4.4
TIVE. Jacketed Vessel Heat Exchanger ( )
4.5
TIVS. Coil Vessel Heat Exchanger ( )
4.6
TIFT. Turbulent Flow Heat Exchanger ( )
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Common items for Heat Exchangers type”TI”:
1 TIUS. Base Service Unit:
This unit is common for Heat Exchangers type “TI” and can work with one or several exchangers.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Stainless steel tank equipped with:
Electric resistance. Temperature sensor to measure the water temperature. Level switch to control the water level of the
tank. Stainless steel cover to avoid the contact with the hot water, in this cover exists an hole to allows us to visualize the
water level and even to stuff the tank. Draining water valve.
Centrifugal pump with velocity adapter.
2 Flow sensors, one to control hot water and the other for cold water.
2 Control valves. 4 Ball valves that, depending on how do we manipulate them, they give us parallel or crosscurrent flux in
the exchanger.
Dimensions (approx.) =1180 x700 x500 mm. Weight : 50Kg.
2 TICC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process.
Realtime curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
Dimensions (approx.) =490 x330 x310 mm. Weight: 10Kg.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 Heat Exchangers available to be used with the Base Service Unit
4.1 TITC. Concentric Tube Heat Exchanger:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Formed by two concentric copper tubes with hot water circulating through the interior tube and cold water circulating in the
ring space.
Exchange length L = 2 x 0.5 = 1 m.
Internal tube: Internal diameter: Dint = 16•10 -3 m. External diameter: Dext = 18 • 10 -3 m. Thickness = 10 -3m. Heat transfer
internal area: Ah = 0.0503 m2. Heat transfer external area: Ac= 0.0565m2.
External tube: Internal diameter: Dint = 26 • 10 -3 m. External diameter: Dext = 28 • 10 -3 m. Thickness = 10 -3 m.
6 Temperature sensors. 4 Flexible tubes to connect the exchanger with the Base Service Unit.
Computer Control Software: Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Concentric Tube Heat
Exchanger (TITC):
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling
velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
time.
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1180 x700 x320mm. Weight: 20Kg.
4.2 TIPL. Plate Heat Exchanger:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Formed by corrugated stainless steel plates. 4 ports or connections of input and output of hot and cold water. 4 Temperature
sensors. 4 Flexible tubes to connect the exchanger with the Base Service Unit.
Computer Control Software: Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Plate Heat Exchanger
(TIPL). (#)
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1180 x700 x320 mm. Weight: 20Kg.
Continue...
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 45
Practices to be done with the
Concentric Tube Heat Exchanger
(TITC):
1.-
Control system: Temperature
sensors calibration.
2.-
Control system: Flow sensors
calibration.
3.-
Study of the hysteresis of the flow
sensor.
4.-
Global energy balance in the
exchanger and the study of losses.
5.-
Exchanger effectiveness
determination. NTU Method.
6.-
Study of the heat transfer under of
countercurrent and parallel flown
conditions.
7.-
Flow influence in the heat transfer.
Reynolds number calculation.
8-26 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Plate
Heat Exchanger (TIPL):
27.- Control system: Temperature
sensors calibration.
28.- Control system: Flow sensors
calibration.
29.- Study of the hysteresis of the flow
sensor.
30.- Global energy balance in the
exchanger and the study of losses.
31.- E x c h a n g e r e f f e c t i v e n e s s
determination. NTU Method.
32.- Study of the heat transfer under of
countercurrent and parallel flow
conditions.
33.- Flow influence in the heat transfer.
Reynolds number calculation.
34-52 .- Practices with PLC.
Continue...
www.edibon.com
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
4
TIUS. Base Service Unit
9.7- Heat Exchange
(continuation)
TICC. Computer Controlled Heat Exchangers Training System:(continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY (continuation)
4 Heat Exchangers available to be used with the Base Service Unit (continuation):
4.3 TICT.Shell & Tube Heat Exchanger:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Formed by tubes of stainless steel with hot water circulating for the interior.
4 segmented baffles located transversal in the shell.
Exchange length of the shell and each tube: L = 0.5m.
Interior tube:
Internal diameter: Dint = 8 • 10-3 m. External diameter: Dext= 10 • 10-3 m. Thickness = 10-3 m. Internal heat transfer
area: Ah = 0.0126 m2. External heat transfer area for each tube: Ac = 0.0157m2
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
Shell:
Internal diameter: Dint,c = 0.148 m. External diameter: Dext,c = 0.160 m. Thickness = 6 • 10-3 m.
7 Temperature sensors.
4 Flexible tubes to connect the exchanger with the Base Service Unit.
Computer Control Software: Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Shell & Tube Heat
Exchanger (TICT).(#)
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1180 x700 x500mm. Weight: 30Kg.
4.4 TIVE. Jacketed Vessel Heat Exchanger:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Constituted of a vessel.
An overflow or a pipe that allows the exit of the water in the vessel through its superior part to maintain a constant flow during
the process withcontinuous supply.
A jacket that surrounds the vessel through where hot water flows.
An electric stirrer with a stirring rod of propeller shape and a turn range between 50 and 2000 rpm.
A calibrated ruler placed on the surface of the vessel that indicates the volume of hot water contained in the vessel.
5 Temperature sensors.
4 Flexible tubes to connect the exchanger with the Base Service Unit.
Computer Control Software: Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Jacketed Vessel Heat
Exchanger (TIVE). (#)
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1180 x700 x700mm. Weight: 35Kg.
4.5 TIVS. Coil Vessel Heat Exchanger:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Formed by a pvc-glass vessel. Dint = 0.188 m. Dext = 0.200 m.
An overflow or pvc-glass tube lets the output of water from the vessel in the upper part in order to maintain the flow constant
for continue supply process.
A copper coil where the water circulates: Dint = 4.35 mm. Dext = 6.35 mm. Total longitude of the tube that forms the coil: 5
m. Total diameter of coil: 0.1m.
An electronic stirring using a stirring rod forming a propeller and with a turn range between 50 and 2000 rpm.
A graduated ruler situated on the surface of the vessel indicates the flow of water into the vessel.
5 Temperature sensors.
4 Flexible tubes to connect the exchanger with the Base Service Unit.
Computer Control Software: Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Coil Vessel Heat
Exchanger (TIVS).(#)
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1180 x700 x700mm. Weight: 30Kg.
4.6 TIFT. Turbulent Flow Heat Exchanger:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Formed by two copper concentric tubes with hot water circulating through the internal tube and cold water circulating
through the annular space.
Exchange length: L = 3 x 0.5 = 1.5 m.
Internal tube:
Internal diameter: Dint = 8 • 10 -3 m. External diameter: Dext = 10 • 10 -3 m. Thickness = 10 -3 m. Internal heat transfer
area: Ah = 0.0377 m2. External heat transfer area: Ac = 0.0471 m2 .
External tube:
Internal diameter: Dint,c 13 • 10 -3 m. External diameter: Dext,c 15 • 10 -3 m. Thickness = 10 -3 m.
12 Temperature sensors.
4 Flexible tubes to connect the exchange with the Base Service Unit.
Computer Control Software: Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Turbulent Flow Heat
Exchanger (TIFT).(#)
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1180 x700 x350 mm. Weight:20 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
heatexchange/TICC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 46
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES(continuation)
Practices to be done with the Shell &
Tube Heat Exchanger (TICT):
53.- Control system: Temperature
sensors calibration.
54.- Control system: Flow sensors
calibration.
55.- Study of the hysteresis of the flow
sensor.
56.- Global energy balance in the
exchanger and the study of
losses.
57.- E x c h a n g e r e f f e c t i v e n e s s
determination. NTU Method.
58.- Study of the heat transfer under of
countercurrent and parallel flow
conditions.
59.- Flow influence in the heat transfer.
Reynolds number calculation.
60-78 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the
Jacketed Vessel Heat Exchanger
(TIVE):
79.- Control system: Temperature
sensors calibration.
80.- Control system: Flow sensors
calibration.
81.- Study of the hysteresis of the flow
sensor.
82.- Global balance of energy in the
exchanger and losses study.
83.- Determination of the exchanger
effectiveness. Method NTU.
84.- Influence of the flow in the heat
transfer . Calculation of the
number of Reynolds.
85.- Influence of the stirring of the vessel
on the heat transfer when
operating by lots.
86.- Influence of the vessel's water
volume on the heat transfer when
operating by lots.
87-105 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Coil
Vessel Heat Exchanger (TIVS):
106.- Control System: Temperature
sensors calibration.
107.- Control System: Flow sensors
calibration.
108.- Study of the hysteresis of the flow
sensor
.
109.- Global balance of energy in the
exchanger and the study of losses.
110.-Determination of the exchanger
effectiveness. NTU Method.
111.- Influence of the flow in the heating
transfer. Calculation of Reynolds
number.
112.-Influence of the stirring vessel in the
heat transfer with operation in
lots.
113.- Influence of the water volume in
the vessel about the heat transfer
with operation lots.
114-132 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the
Turbulent Flow Heat Exchanger
(TIFT):
133.-Control system: Temperature
sensors calibration.
134.-Control system: Flow sensors
calibration.
135.-Study of the hysteresis in the flow
sensors.
136.-Global energy balance in the
exchangers and loss study.
137.-Determination of the exchanger
effectiveness. NTU Method.
138.-Study of the heat transfer in
crosscurrent and parallel flow
conditions.
139.-Flow influence in heat transfer.
Reynolds number calculation.
140.-Obtaining of the correlation that
relates Nusselt number with
Reynolds number and Prandtl
number.
141.-Obtaining of the heat transfer
coefficients by convection.
142-160 .- Practices with PLC.
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0953/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
TICC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS
TRAINING SYSTEMS
1
1
2
0953PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
0953PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
0953IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
5
0952CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
0953TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
0953MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
PROCESS CONTROL.BASIC MODULE
Ref: 1010
1 / 2
ITEM
1
REFERENCE
UCP
UCP-UB
UCP/CIB
DAB
UCP/CCSOF
,
UCP-T
UCP-C
UCP-N
UCP-PA
UCP-pH
UCP-CT
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
(WITH ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL
DISOLVED SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
BASE UNIT. (COMMON FOR ALL SETS FOR PROCESS
CONTROL TYPE "UCP")
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL
SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR pH PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL
DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
UCP/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
1
3
1010PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
4
1010PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
5
1010IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
6
1010CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
7
1010TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
8
1010MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 1010
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
UCP. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with electronic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCP-UB. Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCP-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
4.3 UCP-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.4 UCP-PA.
Set for Pressure
Process Control
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
4.2 UCP-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
+
+
UCP-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.5
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
+
4.6 UCP-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCP-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one
or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Proportional valve: motorized control valve.
2 UCP/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one or
several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCP-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCP-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCP-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4
UCP-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5 UCP-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6 UCP-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCP-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP.pdf
Page 61
www.edibon.com
10.- Process Control
Sensor and elements
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCPCN. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with pneumatic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCPCN-UB.
Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCPCN-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
+
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
4.2
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.3
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
4.4 UCPCN-PA.
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.6 UCPCN-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
10.- Process Control
+
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
4.5
Set for Pressure
Process Control
Sensor and elements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCPCN-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with
one or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Pneumatic Control Valve.
2 UCPCN/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with one
or several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCPCN-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCPCN-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCPCN-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4 UCPCN-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5UCPCN-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6 UCPCN-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCN-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCN.pdf
Page 62
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCPCV. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with speed controller):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCPCV-UB.
Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCPCV-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
+
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
4.2
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.3
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-PA.
Set for Pressure
Process Control
4.5
UCPCV-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.6 UCPCV-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
4.4
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCPCV-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with
one or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Speed controller (into the Control Interface Box).
2 UCPCV/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with one
or several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCPCV-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCPCV-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCPCV-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4
UCPCV-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5 UCPCV-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6
UCPCV-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCV-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCV.pdf
Page 63
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
www.edibon.com
10.- Process Control
Sensor and elements
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCP/FSS. Faults Simulation System (Process Control Unit):
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The "FAULTS" mode consists on provoking several faults
in the unit normal operation. The student must find them
and, if possible, solve them.
There are several kinds of faults that can be grouped in
three sections:
Faults affecting the sensors measure:
- An incorrect calibration is applied to them.
In this case, the student should proceed to
calibrate the affected sensor through the
values collection.
- Non-linearity.
When we have the measures taken by the
sensor, a quadratic or inverse function is
applied to them. Thus, the value measured will
not be the real one, as in the case above
mentioned, but when we calibrate again, the
sensor will not operate linearly and we will not be
able to calibrate it by lest squares fits.
Faults affecting the actuators: (These do not admit
solutions. The student must just realise it and
notify it.)
- Actuators canals interchange at any time
during the program execution.
This error does not admit any solution.
- Response reduction of an actuator.
By the reduction of the output voltage in analog
outputs, we can get an response with
a fraction of what it should be, either with a
manual execution or with any control type
(ON/OFF, PID...).
Faults in the controls execution:
- Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls.
The state of some actuator is inverted, when it
should be ON
is OFF instead, and vice
versa. The student should provide the correct
operating logic.
- Reduction or increase of the calculated total
response.
We multiply by a factor the total response
calculated by the PID, provoking, thus, the
reduction or increase of the action really applied
to the actuator, and the consequent
instability of the control. The student should notify
it and try to calculate this factor.
- The action of some controls is annulled.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/
UCP.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Incorrect Calibration:
1.- Load the calibration error of the PH sensor.
2.- Load the calibration error of the Level sensor.
3.- Load the calibration error of the Flow sensor.
4.- Load the calibration error of the Temperature sensor.
Non Linearity:
5.- Non inverse linearity of the pH sensor.
6.- Non quadratic linearity of the Level sensor.
7.- Non quadratic linearity of the Flow sensor.
8.- No inverse linearity of the Temperature sensor.
Interchange of actuators:
9.- Interchange the bombs AB-1 and AB-2 between
them during the operations of the controls ON/OFF
and PID. (Affected sensor: Level sensor).
Reduction of an actuator response:
10.- In the PID, the real response of the proportional valve is
half the amount calculated by the PID control. Thus,
the maximum real opening that will be able to reach is
50%. (Affected sensor: Flow sensor).
Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls:
11.- In the ON/OFF control, the actuation sensor of the
AVS-1 is inverted, acting, thus, on the same way as the
others 2 valves (for a good control, it should operate
the other way around to how the others 2 do it).
(Affected sensor: pH).
Reduction or increase of the calculated total response:
12.- In the PID, the real action in the resistance is half of the
total calculated. (Affected sensor: Temperature
sensor).
The action of some controls is annulled:
13.- The Integral control does not work. It is reduced to a PD
control (Proportional-Derivative).
14.- The Derivative Control does not work. It is reduced to a
PI Control (Proportional-Integral).
15.- The Integral and Derivative controls do not work. They
are reduced to a Proportional Control.
UCP-P. Computer Controlled Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
10.- Process Control
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
1 Unit: UCP-P. Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1.- Calculating the fluid flow in function
of different pressure sensor.
2.- Calibration processes.
3.- Pressure sensor calibration. Study of
the hysteresis curve.
4.- I/P converter calibration.
5.- Identification of the pneumatic valve
type.
6.- Determination of the influence of the
flow rate of the conduction.
7.- Pressure control in conduction using
a PID controller.
8.- Proportional control (P)characteristics.
9.- Characteristics of a proportional
and integral control (P+I).
10.- Characteristics of a proportional
and derivative control (P+D).
11.- Optimization of the variables of a
PID controller.
12.-Optimization of the variables of the
PID controller, flow control.
13- Flow rate control in conduction with
a PID controller.
14-32.- Practices with PLC.
UCP-P. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Pressure sensor. Differential pressure sensor. Pneumatically Operated Control Valve. On/off valves. Pressure regulators, one
for controlling the pneumatic operated control valve and the second supplies the necessary flow and/or pressure to the circuit
that is to be adjusted. Storage tank. Pressure manometers. Flow meter. Intel/outlet valve. Diaphragm. Exhaust valve. I/P
Converter.
2 UCP-P/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the
PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, other electronic in control interface, and
the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 UCP-P/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)=Unit: 600x500x1000 mm. Weight: 15Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x175 mm. Weight: 15 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP-P.pdf
Page 64
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
CECI. Industrial Controllers Trainer
(continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Trainer for industrial process controllers. This trainer allows students the
study and familiarisation with the function and operation of a industrial
process controller.
Steel box.
Configurable digital controller:
2 inputs, 1 output. Configurable as P, PI or PID controller.
Proportional gain Xp: 0 -999.9%. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s.
Derivative time Tv: 0-1200s. RS232 interface for configuration on
computer (PC).
Digital voltmeter: 0 -20V.
Signal generator with potentiometer. Reference variables generator: 2
voltages selectable. Output voltage: 0-10V.
Controlled system simulator:
Controlled system type: First order lag . Time constant: 20s. Process
variables as analogue signals: 0-10V. System gain: 1...10.
All variables accessible as analog signals at lab jacks .
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for
example:line recorder, plotter, oscilloscope...).
Configuration software CD. Interface cable. Set of lab cables.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm.
Weight : 8 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CECI.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
To study methods and terminology of
process control:
1.-Closed loop control.
2.-Static and dynamic transfer function.
3.-To study the step response.
4.-Reference variable step.
To learn and to familiarise with a process
controller:
5.-Configuration level.
6.-Parameter level.
7.-Operation control levels.
Control parameters:
8.-Setting input channels.
9.-Setting output channels.
10.-To use computer (PC) - based
configuration tools.
11.- Scaling displays.
CRCI. Industrial Controllers Networking
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This trainer enables to take the first steps in process automation using field
buses. This trainer demonstrates the operation of a process control system
based on a simple application.
This trainer allows student the familiarisation with the function and operation
of a industrial process controller.
Steel box.
2 Digital process controllers, with field bus interface:
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp : 0-999.9%.
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s.
Controller parameter setting via field bus system.
2 Signal generators: 0-10V. Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC).
Process variables as analog signals: 0-10V. All variables accessible as
analog signals at lab jacks .
Software CD with driver software, OPC server and process control software.
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example:
line recorder, oscilloscope, etc).
Set of cables.
Manuals:This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)=490x330x310 mm.
Weight : 12 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CRCI.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Function of a digital industrial
controller.
2.- Layout of a field bus system.
To learn and to familiarise with the
operation and structure of a process
control system under Profibus DP:
3.- Controller parameter setting via field
bus system.
4.- Profibus DP field bus system.
5.- OPC (OLE for Process Control)
server function.
6.- Online controller parameters
setting.
7.- Master / slave assignment.
8.- To configure and display alarms.
9.- Reading control variables and
displaying them online.
10.- Scaling displays.
11.- Bus configuration.
CEAB. Trainer for Field Bus Application
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAB.pdf
CEAC. Controller Tuning Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Trainer for controller tuning.This unit permits the interaction between
controller and controlled system. The objective is that the closed control
loop, formed by the controller and the controlled system, to show the desired
optimum response.
With a simulation software the setting of controller parameters can be
practised safely. Closed an open loop control, step response, stability,
disturbance and control response are demonstrated.
This trainer no needs real controlled systems, the controlled system is
simulated on a computer (PC) by the simulation program. In this program
the most important types of controlled systems can be selected . We can
recorder and analyse the time response using the software.
The process controller used can be easily configured from the computer
(PC).The controller and the computer (PC) are connected by a data
acquisition card with AD and DA converters.
Steel box.
Configurable digital process controller, with interface:
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp: 0-999.9%.
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s.
Interface for computer (PC). Data acquisition card for computer (PC).
Simulation Software for controlled system models, such as 1st and 2nd order
lags, time-delayed systems etc. Controlled system simulation models with
proportional, integral, 1st order lag, 2nd order lag, time-delayed response,
non-linearity and limitation.
Configuration software for process controller. Recording and evaluation of
time response on computer (PC).
Set of cables.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= 330x330x145 mm. Weight : 5 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAC.pdf
Page 65
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Operation and function of a digital
industrial controller.
2.- Function of an analog input/outputs
module.
3.- Function of a digital input/output
module.
4.- Layout of a field bus system.
5.- Familiarisation with the field bus
stations.
6.- Defining the bus technology with the
stations.
7.- Reading out and in, and online
displaying of analog and digital
process variables.
8.- Communication protocols.
9.- To define tags.
10.- Familiarisation with the device
master file “DMF”.
11.- OPC server.
12.- Access to the OPC database from
the process control program.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To use commonly applied tuning
rules, such as Ziegler-Nichols.
2.- To study the difference between
open and closed loop control.
3.- Control loop comprising controller
and controlled system.
4.- To determine the system parameters.
5.- Closed-loop control system
response.
6.- Choice of optimum controller
parameters.
7.- Stability, steady state and transient
response.
8.- Study and investigation of control
and disturbance response.
9.- Study of the stability of the closed
control loop.
10.- Learning methods and terminology
involved in process control.
11.- To adapt the process controller to
different controlled systems.
12.- Use and practices with the
simulation software.
www.edibon.com
10.- Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This Trainer is used to teach the initial or first steps in field bus tecnology
based on Profibus DP.
The field bus permits networking terminal devices (controllers, actuators or
sensors) in the plant system (field level) with the control room (control level).
Several devices (slaves) are activated and read by a computer (PC) with a
Profibus DP interface (master).
Different subjects or topics can be covered and studied: bus topology,
system configurator with Device Master File “DMF”, communication
protocols, tags, OPC server, output and input process data, etc.
Steel box.
Digital process controller, with Profibus DP interface:
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp:0-999.9%.
Derivative time Tv:0-1200s. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s.
Signal generators: 0-10V. Digital voltmeter: 0-20V.
Digital Profibus DP I module. Digital Profibus DP O module. Four digital
inputs. Four digital outputs.
Analog Profibus DP I module. Analog Profibus DP O module. Four analog
inputs: 0-10V. Two analog outputs: 0-10V.
Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC).
Process variables as analog signals at lab jacks: 0-10V.
Software CD with driver software, system configurator, OPC server and
process control software.
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example:
chart recorder, oscilloscope, etc).
Set of cables.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm.
Weight : 12 Kg.
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 1010/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
UCP/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
1
1
2
1010PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
1010PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
1010IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
5
1010CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
1010TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
1010MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
PROCESS CONTROL.MEDIUM MODULE
Ref: 1011
1 / 3
ITEM
1
REFERENCE
UCP-P
UCP-P.Unit
UCP-P/CIB
DAB
UCP-P/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
PRESSURE (AIR), COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED
BY:
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
PRESSURE (AIR)
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
UCP-P/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
PRESSURE (AIR) (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
3
UCPCN
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
(WITH PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
BASE UNIT (COMMON FOR ALLA SETS FOR CONTROL
TYPE "UCPCN"
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR COMPUTER
CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH
PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER CONTROLLED
PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH PNEUMATIC
CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS CONTROL OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS,
FORMED BY:
SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL
SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR PH PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL
DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
1
UCPCN-UB
UCPCN/CIB
DAB
UCPCN/CCSOF
,
UCPCN-T
UCPCN-C
UCPCN-N
UCPCN-PA
UCPCN-PH
UCPCN-CT
4
UCPCV
UCPCV-UB
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
(WITH SPEED CONTROLLER) FOR PROCESS CONTROL
OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
BASE UNIT (COMMON FOR ALL SETS FOR PROCESS
CONTROL TYPE"UCPCV"
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ref: 1011
2 / 3
ITEM
4
REFERENCE
UCPCV/CIB
DAB
UCPCV/CCSOF
,
UCPCV-T
UCPCV-C
UCPCV-N
UCPCV-PA
UCPCV-PH
UCPCV-CT
DESCRIPTION
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR COMPUTER
CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH
SPEED CONTROLLER) FOR PROCESS CONTROL OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS,
FORMED BY:
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER CONTROLLED
PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH SPEED
CONTROLLER)FOR PROCESS CONTROL OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS,
FORMED BY:
SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL
SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR PH PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL
DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
UCPCV/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
(WITH SPEED CONTROLLER)FOR PROCESS CONTROL
OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
1
6
1011PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
7
1011PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
8
1011IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
9
1011CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
10
1011TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
11
1011MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 1011
3 / 3
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCP/FSS. Faults Simulation System (Process Control Unit):
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The "FAULTS" mode consists on provoking several faults
in the unit normal operation. The student must find them
and, if possible, solve them.
There are several kinds of faults that can be grouped in
three sections:
Faults affecting the sensors measure:
- An incorrect calibration is applied to them.
In this case, the student should proceed to
calibrate the affected sensor through the
values collection.
- Non-linearity.
When we have the measures taken by the
sensor, a quadratic or inverse function is
applied to them. Thus, the value measured will
not be the real one, as in the case above
mentioned, but when we calibrate again, the
sensor will not operate linearly and we will not be
able to calibrate it by lest squares fits.
Faults affecting the actuators: (These do not admit
solutions. The student must just realise it and
notify it.)
- Actuators canals interchange at any time
during the program execution.
This error does not admit any solution.
- Response reduction of an actuator.
By the reduction of the output voltage in analog
outputs, we can get an response with
a fraction of what it should be, either with a
manual execution or with any control type
(ON/OFF, PID...).
Faults in the controls execution:
- Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls.
The state of some actuator is inverted, when it
should be ON
is OFF instead, and vice
versa. The student should provide the correct
operating logic.
- Reduction or increase of the calculated total
response.
We multiply by a factor the total response
calculated by the PID, provoking, thus, the
reduction or increase of the action really applied
to the actuator, and the consequent
instability of the control. The student should notify
it and try to calculate this factor.
- The action of some controls is annulled.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/
UCP.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Incorrect Calibration:
1.- Load the calibration error of the PH sensor.
2.- Load the calibration error of the Level sensor.
3.- Load the calibration error of the Flow sensor.
4.- Load the calibration error of the Temperature sensor.
Non Linearity:
5.- Non inverse linearity of the pH sensor.
6.- Non quadratic linearity of the Level sensor.
7.- Non quadratic linearity of the Flow sensor.
8.- No inverse linearity of the Temperature sensor.
Interchange of actuators:
9.- Interchange the bombs AB-1 and AB-2 between
them during the operations of the controls ON/OFF
and PID. (Affected sensor: Level sensor).
Reduction of an actuator response:
10.- In the PID, the real response of the proportional valve is
half the amount calculated by the PID control. Thus,
the maximum real opening that will be able to reach is
50%. (Affected sensor: Flow sensor).
Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls:
11.- In the ON/OFF control, the actuation sensor of the
AVS-1 is inverted, acting, thus, on the same way as the
others 2 valves (for a good control, it should operate
the other way around to how the others 2 do it).
(Affected sensor: pH).
Reduction or increase of the calculated total response:
12.- In the PID, the real action in the resistance is half of the
total calculated. (Affected sensor: Temperature
sensor).
The action of some controls is annulled:
13.- The Integral control does not work. It is reduced to a PD
control (Proportional-Derivative).
14.- The Derivative Control does not work. It is reduced to a
PI Control (Proportional-Integral).
15.- The Integral and Derivative controls do not work. They
are reduced to a Proportional Control.
UCP-P. Computer Controlled Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
10.- Process Control
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
1 Unit: UCP-P. Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1.- Calculating the fluid flow in function
of different pressure sensor.
2.- Calibration processes.
3.- Pressure sensor calibration. Study of
the hysteresis curve.
4.- I/P converter calibration.
5.- Identification of the pneumatic valve
type.
6.- Determination of the influence of the
flow rate of the conduction.
7.- Pressure control in conduction using
a PID controller.
8.- Proportional control (P)characteristics.
9.- Characteristics of a proportional
and integral control (P+I).
10.- Characteristics of a proportional
and derivative control (P+D).
11.- Optimization of the variables of a
PID controller.
12.-Optimization of the variables of the
PID controller, flow control.
13- Flow rate control in conduction with
a PID controller.
14-32.- Practices with PLC.
UCP-P. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Pressure sensor. Differential pressure sensor. Pneumatically Operated Control Valve. On/off valves. Pressure regulators, one
for controlling the pneumatic operated control valve and the second supplies the necessary flow and/or pressure to the circuit
that is to be adjusted. Storage tank. Pressure manometers. Flow meter. Intel/outlet valve. Diaphragm. Exhaust valve. I/P
Converter.
2 UCP-P/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the
PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, other electronic in control interface, and
the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 UCP-P/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)=Unit: 600x500x1000 mm. Weight: 15Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x175 mm. Weight: 15 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP-P.pdf
Page 64
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCPCN. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with pneumatic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCPCN-UB.
Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCPCN-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
+
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
4.2
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.3
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
4.4 UCPCN-PA.
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.6 UCPCN-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
10.- Process Control
+
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
4.5
Set for Pressure
Process Control
Sensor and elements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCPCN-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with
one or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Pneumatic Control Valve.
2 UCPCN/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with one
or several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCPCN-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCPCN-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCPCN-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4 UCPCN-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5UCPCN-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6 UCPCN-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCN-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCN.pdf
Page 62
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCPCV. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with speed controller):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCPCV-UB.
Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCPCV-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
+
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
4.2
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.3
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-PA.
Set for Pressure
Process Control
4.5
UCPCV-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.6 UCPCV-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
4.4
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCPCV-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with
one or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Speed controller (into the Control Interface Box).
2 UCPCV/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with one
or several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCPCV-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCPCV-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCPCV-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4
UCPCV-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5 UCPCV-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6
UCPCV-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCV-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCV.pdf
Page 63
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
www.edibon.com
10.- Process Control
Sensor and elements
issue:01/11
PROCESS CONTROL.MEDIUM MODULE
Ref: 1011
1 / 3
ITEM
1
REFERENCE
UCP-P
UCP-P.Unit
UCP-P/CIB
DAB
UCP-P/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
PRESSURE (AIR), COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED
BY:
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
PRESSURE (AIR)
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
UCP-P/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
PRESSURE (AIR) (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
3
UCPCN
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
(WITH PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
BASE UNIT (COMMON FOR ALLA SETS FOR CONTROL
TYPE "UCPCN"
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR COMPUTER
CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH
PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER CONTROLLED
PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH PNEUMATIC
CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS CONTROL OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS,
FORMED BY:
SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL
SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR PH PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL
DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
1
UCPCN-UB
UCPCN/CIB
DAB
UCPCN/CCSOF
,
UCPCN-T
UCPCN-C
UCPCN-N
UCPCN-PA
UCPCN-PH
UCPCN-CT
4
UCPCV
UCPCV-UB
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
(WITH SPEED CONTROLLER) FOR PROCESS CONTROL
OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
BASE UNIT (COMMON FOR ALL SETS FOR PROCESS
CONTROL TYPE"UCPCV"
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ref: 1011
2 / 3
ITEM
4
REFERENCE
UCPCV/CIB
DAB
UCPCV/CCSOF
,
UCPCV-T
UCPCV-C
UCPCV-N
UCPCV-PA
UCPCV-PH
UCPCV-CT
DESCRIPTION
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR COMPUTER
CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH
SPEED CONTROLLER) FOR PROCESS CONTROL OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS,
FORMED BY:
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER CONTROLLED
PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH SPEED
CONTROLLER)FOR PROCESS CONTROL OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS,
FORMED BY:
SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL
SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR PH PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL
DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
UCPCV/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
(WITH SPEED CONTROLLER)FOR PROCESS CONTROL
OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
1
6
1011PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
7
1011PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
8
1011IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
9
1011CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
10
1011TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
11
1011MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 1011
3 / 3
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCP/FSS. Faults Simulation System (Process Control Unit):
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The "FAULTS" mode consists on provoking several faults
in the unit normal operation. The student must find them
and, if possible, solve them.
There are several kinds of faults that can be grouped in
three sections:
Faults affecting the sensors measure:
- An incorrect calibration is applied to them.
In this case, the student should proceed to
calibrate the affected sensor through the
values collection.
- Non-linearity.
When we have the measures taken by the
sensor, a quadratic or inverse function is
applied to them. Thus, the value measured will
not be the real one, as in the case above
mentioned, but when we calibrate again, the
sensor will not operate linearly and we will not be
able to calibrate it by lest squares fits.
Faults affecting the actuators: (These do not admit
solutions. The student must just realise it and
notify it.)
- Actuators canals interchange at any time
during the program execution.
This error does not admit any solution.
- Response reduction of an actuator.
By the reduction of the output voltage in analog
outputs, we can get an response with
a fraction of what it should be, either with a
manual execution or with any control type
(ON/OFF, PID...).
Faults in the controls execution:
- Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls.
The state of some actuator is inverted, when it
should be ON
is OFF instead, and vice
versa. The student should provide the correct
operating logic.
- Reduction or increase of the calculated total
response.
We multiply by a factor the total response
calculated by the PID, provoking, thus, the
reduction or increase of the action really applied
to the actuator, and the consequent
instability of the control. The student should notify
it and try to calculate this factor.
- The action of some controls is annulled.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/
UCP.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Incorrect Calibration:
1.- Load the calibration error of the PH sensor.
2.- Load the calibration error of the Level sensor.
3.- Load the calibration error of the Flow sensor.
4.- Load the calibration error of the Temperature sensor.
Non Linearity:
5.- Non inverse linearity of the pH sensor.
6.- Non quadratic linearity of the Level sensor.
7.- Non quadratic linearity of the Flow sensor.
8.- No inverse linearity of the Temperature sensor.
Interchange of actuators:
9.- Interchange the bombs AB-1 and AB-2 between
them during the operations of the controls ON/OFF
and PID. (Affected sensor: Level sensor).
Reduction of an actuator response:
10.- In the PID, the real response of the proportional valve is
half the amount calculated by the PID control. Thus,
the maximum real opening that will be able to reach is
50%. (Affected sensor: Flow sensor).
Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls:
11.- In the ON/OFF control, the actuation sensor of the
AVS-1 is inverted, acting, thus, on the same way as the
others 2 valves (for a good control, it should operate
the other way around to how the others 2 do it).
(Affected sensor: pH).
Reduction or increase of the calculated total response:
12.- In the PID, the real action in the resistance is half of the
total calculated. (Affected sensor: Temperature
sensor).
The action of some controls is annulled:
13.- The Integral control does not work. It is reduced to a PD
control (Proportional-Derivative).
14.- The Derivative Control does not work. It is reduced to a
PI Control (Proportional-Integral).
15.- The Integral and Derivative controls do not work. They
are reduced to a Proportional Control.
UCP-P. Computer Controlled Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
10.- Process Control
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
1 Unit: UCP-P. Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1.- Calculating the fluid flow in function
of different pressure sensor.
2.- Calibration processes.
3.- Pressure sensor calibration. Study of
the hysteresis curve.
4.- I/P converter calibration.
5.- Identification of the pneumatic valve
type.
6.- Determination of the influence of the
flow rate of the conduction.
7.- Pressure control in conduction using
a PID controller.
8.- Proportional control (P)characteristics.
9.- Characteristics of a proportional
and integral control (P+I).
10.- Characteristics of a proportional
and derivative control (P+D).
11.- Optimization of the variables of a
PID controller.
12.-Optimization of the variables of the
PID controller, flow control.
13- Flow rate control in conduction with
a PID controller.
14-32.- Practices with PLC.
UCP-P. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Pressure sensor. Differential pressure sensor. Pneumatically Operated Control Valve. On/off valves. Pressure regulators, one
for controlling the pneumatic operated control valve and the second supplies the necessary flow and/or pressure to the circuit
that is to be adjusted. Storage tank. Pressure manometers. Flow meter. Intel/outlet valve. Diaphragm. Exhaust valve. I/P
Converter.
2 UCP-P/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the
PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, other electronic in control interface, and
the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 UCP-P/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)=Unit: 600x500x1000 mm. Weight: 15Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x175 mm. Weight: 15 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP-P.pdf
Page 64
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCPCN. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with pneumatic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCPCN-UB.
Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCPCN-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
+
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
4.2
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.3
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
4.4 UCPCN-PA.
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.6 UCPCN-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
10.- Process Control
+
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
4.5
Set for Pressure
Process Control
Sensor and elements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCPCN-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with
one or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Pneumatic Control Valve.
2 UCPCN/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with one
or several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCPCN-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCPCN-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCPCN-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4 UCPCN-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5UCPCN-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6 UCPCN-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCN-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCN.pdf
Page 62
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCPCV. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with speed controller):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCPCV-UB.
Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCPCV-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
+
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
4.2
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.3
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-PA.
Set for Pressure
Process Control
4.5
UCPCV-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.6 UCPCV-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
4.4
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCPCV-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with
one or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Speed controller (into the Control Interface Box).
2 UCPCV/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with one
or several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCPCV-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCPCV-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCPCV-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4
UCPCV-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5 UCPCV-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6
UCPCV-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCV-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCV.pdf
Page 63
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
www.edibon.com
10.- Process Control
Sensor and elements
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 1011/PLC
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 2
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
UCP-P/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
1
1
2
PLC-PI
UCPCN/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER
CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH
PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
1
1
3
PLC-PI
UCPCV/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER
CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH
SPEED CONTROLLER) FOR PROCESS CONTROL OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS,
FORMED BY:
1
1
4
1011PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
5
1011PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
6
1011IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
7
1011CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
8
1011TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
9
1011MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 1011/PLC
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
Technical and Vocational Education Chemical Engineering Laboratory
(11TV)
List of modules and teaching units included plus
Summarised Catalogues
Priority 3
0100. Physics, Chemisty and Biology
0120: ChemistryBasic Module
0121: Chemistry Medium Module
0200. Electronics
0213-210/20S: Elementary Electronics (20 CAI + CAL)
0231: Sensors Instrumentation
0240: Control Electronics Module
0400. Electricity
0413-410/20S: Domestic Electric Installations (20 CAI + CAL)
0700. Mechanics and Materials
0710/20S: MechanicsBasic Module (20 CAI + CAL)
1300. Environmental
1320: Dirty Water Treatment Modul
1320/PLC: PLC's Module
1321 Clear Water Treatment Basic Module
1321/PLC: PLC's Module
Ref.:11TV-pre(01/11)
issue:01/11
CHEMISTRY MODULE. BASIC MODULE
Ref: 0120
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
CHEI-01
CYLINDER GRADUATED, 100 ML
20
2
CHEI-02
FLASK ROUND, 100 ML
20
3
CHEI-03
BURETTE GRADUATED, 50 ML
20
4
CHEI-04
PIPETTE GRADUATED, 25 ML
20
5
CHEI-05
BURNER BUNSEN
20
6
CHEI-06
BEAKER GRADUATED, 200 ML
20
7
CHEI-07
TEACHING CHEMICAL PRODUCTS. BASIC SET
20
issue:01/11
CHEMISTRY MODULE. MEDIUM MODULE
Ref: 0121
ITEM
1 / 3
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
CHEII-01
HOT PLATE
1
2
CHEII-02
KIT OF GLASS ACCESORIES I
1
3
CHEII-03
KIT OF GLASS ACCESORIES II
1
4
CHEII-04
CRUCIBLE OF PORCELAIN, 20 ML
1
5
CHEII-05
CRUCIBLE OF PORCELAIN, 45 ML
1
6
CHEII-06
CRUCIBLE OF PORCELAIN, 80 ML
1
7
CHEII-07
CRUCIBLE OF PORCELAIN, 120 ML
1
8
CHEII-08
PETRI DISHED, 50 MM DIAM x 12MM H.
1
9
CHEII-09
PETRI DISHED, 100 MM DIAM x 15MM H.
1
10
CHEII-10
PETRI DISHED, 200 MM DIAM x 30MM H.
1
11
CHEII-11
CRISTALLIZER WITH PEAK, 60 ML
1
12
CHEII-12
CRISTALLIZER WITH PEAK, 500 ML
1
13
CHEII-13
CRISTALLIZER WITHOUT PEAK, 100ML
1
14
CHEII-14
CRISTALLIZER WITHOUT PEAK, 500ML
1
15
CHEII-15
CONICAL CUP, 100 ML
1
16
CHEII-16
CONICAL CUP, 250 ML
1
17
CHEII-17
BASIN FOR DYEING SCHIEFFERDECHER
1
18
CHEII-18
BASIN FOR DYEING HELLINDHALL.
1
19
CHEII-19
FUNNEL, CONICAL, 45 MM
1
20
CHEII-20
FUNNEL, CONICAL, 100 MM
1
21
CHEII-21
FUNNEL, 55 ML
1
22
CHEII-22
DROPPING BOTTLES, 30 ML
1
23
CHEII-23
DROPPING BOTTLES, 50 ML
1
24
CHEII-24
DROPPING BOTTLES, 100 ML
1
25
CHEII-25
WOULF BOTTLE OF 3 NECKS, 500 ML
1
26
CHEII-26
FLASK
WITH PLUG, 10 ML
1
27
CHEII-27
FLASK
WITH PLUG, 50 ML
1
28
CHEII-28
FLASK WITH PLUG, 100 ML
1
29
CHEII-29
FLASK ERLENMEYER GRADUATED, WIDE NECK, 50 ML
1
30
CHEII-30
FLASK ERLENMEYER GRADUATED, WIDE NECK, 100
ML
1
31
CHEII-31
FLASK ERLENMEYER GRADUATED, WIDE NECK,
ML
250
1
32
CHEII-32
FLASK ERLENMEYER GRADUATE, NORMAL NECK,
ML
50
1
33
CHEII-33
FLASK ERLENMEYER GRADUATE, NORMAL NECK,
100 ML
1
34
CHEII-34
FLASK ERLENMEYER GRADUATE, NORMAL NECK,
250 ML
1
Ref: 0121
ITEM
2 / 3
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
35
CHEII-35
FLASK FLAT BOTTOM, 50 ML
1
36
CHEII-36
FLASK FLAT BOTTOM, 100 ML
1
37
CHEII-37
FLASK ROUND BOTTOM, 50 ML
1
38
CHEII-38
FLASK ROUND BOTTOM, 100 ML
1
39
CHEII-39
FLASK KEJELDAHL, 100 ML
1
40
CHEII-40
MORTARS AND PESTLES, 200 ML
1
41
CHEII-41
BURETTE GRADUATED, 10 ML
1
42
CHEII-42
PIPPETTE, 1 ML
1
43
CHEII-43
PIPPETTE, 5 ML
1
44
CHEII-44
PIPPETTE, 10 ML
1
45
CHEII-45
PIPPETTE, 100 ML
1
46
CHEII-46
PIPPETTE, 1 ML, WITH 2 LAYOUTS
1
47
CHEII-47
PIPPETTE, 5 ML, WITH 2 LAYOUTS
1
48
CHEII-48
PIPPETTE, 10 ML, WITH 2 LAYOUTS
1
49
CHEII-49
PIPPETTE, 50 ML, WITH 2 LAYOUTS
1
50
CHEII-50
COVERGLASSES (100 UNITS)
1
51
CHEII-51
MICROSCOPE SLIDE (100 UNITS)
1
52
CHEII-52
CYLINDERS GRADUATED
1
53
CHEII-53
CYLINDERS GRADUATED
54
CHEII-54
CYLINDERS GRADUATED
55
CHEII-55
CYLINDERS WITH PEAK, 5 ML
1
56
CHEII-56
CYLINDERS WITH PEAK, 10 ML
1
57
CHEII-57
GRADUATED BEAKER, TALL FORM, 150 ML
1
58
CHEII-58
GRADUATED BEAKER, TALL FORM, 25 ML
1
59
CHEII-59
GRADUATED BEAKER, TALL FORM, 50 ML
1
60
CHEII-60
GRADUATED BEAKER, TALL FORM, 100 ML
1
61
CHEII-61
GRADUATED BEAKER, SHORT FORM, 25 ML
1
62
CHEII-62
GRADUATED BEAKER, SHORT FORM, 50 ML
1
63
CHEII-63
GRADUATED BEAKER, SHORT FORM, 100 ML
1
64
CHEII-64
TEST TUBES GRADUATED, 10 ML
1
65
CHEII-65
TEST TUBES GRADUATE, 20 ML
1
66
CHEII-66
GLASS BOTTLES, NARROW MOUTH, 100 ML
10
67
CHEII-67
GLASS BOTTLES, NARROW MOUTH, 250 ML
10
68
CHEII-68
GLASS BOTTLES,
WIDE MOUTH, 100 ML
1
69
CHEII-69
GLASS BOTTLES,
WIDE MOUTH, 250 ML
1
70
CHEII-70
STIRRING ROD, 6 MM DIAM.
71
CHEII-71
BOSHEADS
1
72
CHEII-72
CLIP (BURETTES AND TEST TUBES)
1
73
CHEII-73
METAL CRUCIBLES
5
74
CHEII-74
BURETTE STAND
5
WITH PEAK, 5 ML
WITH PEAK, 10 ML
WITH PEAK, 50 ML
1
1
10
Ref: 0121
ITEM
3 / 3
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
75
CHEII-75
ORGANIC/INORGANIC TEACHER & STUDENT SET
MODEL
1
76
CHEII-76
TEACHING CHEMICAL PRODUCTS. ADVANCED SET
1
77
0121PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
78
0121PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
79
0121IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
issue:01/11
ELEMENTARY ELECTRONICS (20 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0213-210/20S
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 2
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIEBA
BASIC ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRICITY
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
1
EBC-100
BASE UNIT, WITH BUILT IN POWER SUPPLY
1
2
M1
D. C. CIRCUITS MODULE
1
3
M1/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF D.C
CIRCUITS
20
4
M1/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR D.C.
CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
5
M2
A. C. CIRCUITS MODULE
1
6
M2/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF A.C.
CIRCUITS
20
7
M2/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR A.C.
CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
8
M16
ELECTRICS NETWORKS MODULE
1
9
M16/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ELECTRIC NETWORKS
20
10
M16/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ELECTRICS NETWORKS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
20
11
M17
ELECTROMAGNETISM MODULE
1
12
M17/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ELECTROMAGNETISM
20
13
M17/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ELECTROMAGNETISM (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
20
14
M3
SEMICONDUCTORS I MODULE
1
15
M3/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
SEMICONDUCTORS I
20
16
M3/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
SEMICONDUCTORS I (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
20
17
M5
POWER SUPPLIES MODULE
1
18
M5/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
POWER SUPPLIES
20
19
M5/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR POWER
SUPPLIES (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
21
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
22
EDAS/VIS-0.25
EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
second), FORMED BY:
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
1
VIS
DAIB
DAB
1
1
1
Ref: 0213-210/20S
ITEM
2 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
22
EDAS/SOF
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
23
0210PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
24
0210PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
25
0210IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
26
0210CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
27
0210TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
28
0210MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 20 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Laboratory structure
2
1
Modules
(power supply needed)
Power Supply
2
FA-CO
(M1)
(M9)
(M2)
Modules
(power supply needed)
(M10)
or
EBC-100
(M11)
(M16)
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M17)
INS/SOF.
(M12)
Instructor Software
(M3)
+
(M13)
M../SOF.
Student/Module Software
4
(M4)
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(M14)
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M15)
(M5)
(M31)
(M6)
5
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M7)
DAIB.
(M60)
Data acquisition interface box
(M65)
(M8)
DAB. Data acquisition board
Data Acquisition and
Virtual Instrumentation
Software
EDAS/VIS-SOF.
Other modules
Expansion Board
(M99)
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply + Module/s is the
minimum supply).
Some available Modules
Basic Electricity:
" M14. Optoelectronics.
" M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits.
" M15. Development Module.
" M2. Alternating Current (A.C.)Circuits. Basic Electronics: Transducers:
" M16. Electric Networks.
" M41. Resistance Transducers.
" M17. Electromagnetism.
" M43. Applications of Temperature.
Basic Electronics:
" M44. Applications of Light.
" M3. Semiconductors I.
" M45. Linear Position and Force.
" M4. Semiconductors II.
" M46. Environmental Measurements.
" M5. Power Supplies.
" M47. Rotational Speed & Position
Control.
" M6. Oscillators.
" M48. Sounds Measurements.
" M7. Operational Amplifiers.
" M49. Applications of Temperature and
" M8. Filters.
Pressure.
" M9. Power Electronics.
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics:
" M10. Digital Systems & Converters.
" M60. Analog/Digital Converters.
" M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
" M61. Digital/Analog Converters.
" M12. Basic Combinational Circuits.
" M65. Control and Regulation.
" M13. Basic Sequential Circuits.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities:
" M99. Expansion Board.
Some electronic sub-boards available:
"M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
"M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
"M99-3. Function Generator.
"M99-4. AM Modulator.
"M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can develop any electronic sub-board
according to the application required by
the customer.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 5
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Power Supply
There are two choices for suppling the modules:
FA-CO. Power Supply
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Fixed outputs: + 5 V, ± 12 V, 1 A. Variable outputs: ± 12 V, 0.5 A. AC output: 12V. Outputs through either 2mm. contact terminals, or
through 25 pin CENTRONICS connectors. LED’s voltage indicators. Supply: 110/220V A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
or
EBC-100. Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
CENTRONICS connector. This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 410x298x107mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
2
Modules
These Modules have been designed for making practices using either the FA-CO Power Supply or the EBC-100 Base Unit. The Modules consist in a series of different circuits
which shall allow performing the corresponding exercises separately. All circuits are serigraphed on the surface of each module, thus permitting vision of their REAL components.
Almost all exercises/practices have special switches so that the teacher may SIMULATE CIRCUITRY FAILURE (faults), to be found by the Student. We provide eight manuals per
module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included. Dimensions (approx.) of each module: 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
Basic Electricity
M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits
Measurement managing and checking
instruments:
1.-Electronic instrumentation operation.
Use of multimeter.
2.-Study of fault F1 in Resistance circuit.
3.-Study of fault F2 in Resistance circuit.
4.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Ohm's Law:
5.-Ohm's Law verification.
6.-Power calculation.
7.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors: characteristics and types:
8.-Resistor measurements. Color code.
Ohmmeter.
9.-Study of Fault F1 in Resistors circuit.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
10.-Study of Fault F2 in Resistors circuit.
11.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors association and the Wheatstone
Bridge:
12.-Voltage and current measurement
in a circuit with resistors connected
in series.
13.-Series/Parallel configuration study.
14.-The Wheatstone Bridge.
15.-Study of Fault in Series Resistors
circuit.
16.-Study of Fault in Parallel Resistors
circuit.
17.-Study of Fault F1 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
M2. Alternating Current (A.C.) Circuits
Alternating signal characteristics.
Instruments:
1.- Waveforms study in A.C.
2.- Introduction of anomalies in the
Wave form circuit.
3.- Study of Faults in the Waveform
circuit.
4.- Relation between peak values and
RMS for sinusoidal waves.
5.- Resistance in a sinusoidal
alternating current.
6.-Measurements using the
oscilloscope.
7.- Voltage and current phase angles
for resistors in sinusoidal
alternating current.
8.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in series.
9.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in parallel.
10.- Exercises.
Behaviour of A.C. capacitors and inductors:
11.- Capacitance with square waveform
and sinusoidal input current.
12.- Inductance with square waveform
and a sinusoidal input voltage.
13.- Reactive reactance, Xc, variations
18.- Study of Fault F2 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Kirchoff's laws:
20.- Kirchoff's first law.
21.- Kirchoff's second law.
22.- Fault study using Kirchoff's law.
23.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage/Current dividers.
Batteries and Switches.
Power source in series and parallel.
The Rheostat and Potentiometer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
with the frequency.
14.-Study of faults in capacitors.
15.-Reactive capacitance variations with
the capacitance.
16.-A.C. capacitors in parallel.
17.-A.C. capacitors in series.
18.-A.C. capacitors as voltage dividers.
19.-Inductance in an A.C circuit.
20.-Inductive reactance variations with
the inductance.
21.-Inductors in series in an A.C. circuit.
22.-Exercises.
Basic theorems and capacitance and
inductance circuits:
23.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
series.
24.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
parallel.
25.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
series.
26.-Study of Fault 1 in the Circuit #3.
27.-Study of Fault 2 in the Circuit #3.
28.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
parallel.
29.-Exercises.
RLC Circuits:
30.- Resistance-Capacitance Filters.
31.- Filters inductive resistance. Low Pass
and High- Pass filters.
32.- Exercises.
Resonance:
33.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with low
impedance source.
34.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
35.- Study of Fault 2 in the resonance
Circuit.
36.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with high
impedance source.
37.- Circuit frequency response and
bandwidth.
38.- A.C. R-L-C Circuits in series.
39.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
40.- Exercises.
The transformer:
41.- The transformer.
42.- The transformer with load.
43.- Current measurement in the
secondary Transformer with Charge.
44.- Exercises.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M16. Electric Networks
Ohm’s law:
1.-Calculation of the internal resistance
of a continuous source.
2.-Error study in an internal resistance.
3.-Internal resistance calculation of an
alternating source.
4.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Electrical power:
5.-Power transferred by a DC source to
load.
6.-Power transferred to a load by an AC
source.
7.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Power supplies combination:
8.-DC+DC assembly.
9.- Error study in the circuit, assembly.
10.-DC+AC assembly.
11.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Thévenin’s and Norton’s theorems:
12.-Thévenin and Norton equivalent
circuits. Conversion. Kirchoff’s laws.
13.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Superposition theorem:
14.-Application of the Superposition
theorem.
15.-Error study in the Superposition
circuit. Component values
modifications.
16.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
1.-Magnetic fields measurement.
2.-Induced electromotive force. Coil
Reactance calculation.
3.-Exercises.
Electromagnetic applications:
4.-Mutual Inductance.
5.-Basic operation of the transformer
6.-Core effect in a transformer response.
7.-Fault study in the Transformer.
8.- Basic operation of the solenoid.
9.- Fault study in the Solenoid circuit.
10.-Basic operation of a relay.
11.-Self-holding of the position of the
contacts.
12.-Fault study in the Relay circuit.
13.-Exercises.
Direct current motor:
14.-Characteristic Speed/Voltage of a
M17. Electromagnetism
Star-triangle transformation:
17.- Resistance measurement between
terminals. Delta| Y configurations.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Wheatstone bridge:
19.- Calibration of a Wheatstone bridge
fed by a DC source.
20.- Error study in the Wheatstone bridge
circuit.
21.- Wheatstone bridge calibration fed
by an AC source.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Millman’s Theorem.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 6
continuous current motor.
15.- Motor used as DC generator.
16.- Cemf.
17.- Exercises.
Stepping Motor:
18.- Stepper motor working.
19.- Fault study in Stepping motor circuit.
20.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
M3. Semiconductors I
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Characteristics of the PN junction:
1.- Study of the diode.
2.- Fault Study in Diodes.
3.- Exercises.
The diode as a rectifier element:
4.- Half wave rectifier.
5.- Study of faults in Rectifier circuit.
6.- Bridge rectifier.
7.- Study of faults in bridge rectifier.
8.- Exercises.
The Zener diode:
9.- Voltage regulator with a Zener diode.
10.- Study of faults in Zener circuit.
11.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the transistor:
12.- Study of the transistor.
13.- Study of the fault in the transistor.
14.- Exercises.
Transistor characteristics operating as a
switch:
Complementary transistors pair:
1.- Complementary transistors pair.
2.- Transistors pair with alternating signal.
3.- Fault study of the complementary
Transistor pair.
4.- Exercises.
Darlington configuration:
5.- Darlington configuration.
6.- Fault study of the Darlington
configuration.
7.- Exercises.
Differential amplifier:
8.- Differential amplifier.
9.- Fault study in the differential amplifier.
10.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the JFET
transistor:
11.- JFET characteristics.
12.- Fault study with the JFET transistor.
13.- Exercises.
Rectification:
1.- Rectification.
2.- Bridge rectifier.
3.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Fixed voltage sources:
4.- Power supply with the Zener diode.
5.- Stabilization through Zener and
Transistor.
6.- Fault study in “Stabilization through
Zener and Transistor”.
7.- Protection against overcurrents.
8.- Protection against overvoltages.
9.- Study of the fault “Protection against
overcurrents”.
10.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Symmetrical voltage power sources:
11.- Symmetrical source; 78XX regulator.
12.- Symmetrical source; 79XX regulator.
13.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Voltage regulators with integrated circuits:
14.- Adjustable regulator; LM317.
15.- Study of fault in adjustable LM317.
15.- Study of the transistor as a switch.
16.- Exercises.
Common emitter amplifier:
17.- Study of the common emitter NPN
amplifier.
18.- Fault Study in Amplifier circuit.
19.- Study of the common emitter PNP
amplifier.
20.- Exercises.
M4. Semiconductors II
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switch:
14.- Analog switch.
15.- Exercises.
Multistage Amplifier. Direct coupling:
16.- Amplifier coupled directly.
17.- Fault study of an amplifier coupled
directly.
18.- Exercises.
M5. Power Supplies
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
16.- Adjustable L200 regulator.
17.- Fault Study in adjustable L200.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Introduction to switched power supplies:
19.- Switching technique.
20.- Switching technique. PWM.
21.- Switching technique. Boost.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage Feedback.
DC-DC converter.
M6. Oscillators
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Oscillators. RC and LC Nets:
1.- RC net oscillator.
2.- LC net oscillator.
3.- Faults study with RC and LC Net
oscillators.
4.- Exercises.
Wien bridge oscillator:
5.- Wien Bridge.
6.- Fault study the Wien bridge oscillator.
7.- Exercises.
Colpitts oscillator. Hartley oscillator:
8.- Colpitts oscillator.
9.- Hartley oscillator.
10.- Faults study with the Colpitts
Oscillator.
11.- Exercises.
Astable multivibrator:
12.- Astable multivibrator.
13.- Fault study with an Astable
mulltivibrator.
14.- Exercises.
555 TIMER:
15.- 555 timer.
16.- 555 timer fault study.
17.- Exercises.
M7. Operational Amplifiers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Operational amplifier characteristics:
1.- Operational amplifier study.
2.- Closed-loop output compensation
voltage.
3.- Operational amplifier fault study.
4.- Exercises.
The inverting amplifier:
5.- Inverting amplifier study.
6.- Inverting amplifier fault study.
7.- Exercises.
The non-inverting amplifier:
8.- Study of the non-inverting amplifier.
16.- Differential amplifier fault study.
9.- Voltage follower.
17.- Exercises.
10.- Fault study in the non-inverting Comparators:
Amplifier.
18.- Comparator study.
11.- Exercises.
19.- Comparators fault study.
The adder amplifier:
20.- Exercises.
12.- Adding amplifier study.
Additional Possibilities:
13.- Fault study in the adding amplifier.
Attenuator.
14.- Exercises.
Voltage Divider.
The differential amplifier:
Open-loop operation.
15.- Differential amplifier study.
RC and LC filter responses:
1.- Frequency response.
2.- Low-pass filter.
3.- High-pass filter.
4.- LC Circuit.
5.- Study of Error in Low-pass filter.
6.- Study of Error in High-pass filter.
7.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
T-shaped Filter:
8.- Filter with double T link.
9.- Generator circuit of the signal S1.
10.- Study of Error in RC filter with double T.
11.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Active filters:
12.- Low-pass filter.
13.- Low-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
14.- High-pass filter.
15.- High-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
16.- The attenuation is cumulative.
17.- Use of Operational Amplifier.
M8. Filters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M9. Power Electronics
18.- Study of Faults in filters.
19.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Association of filters:
20.- Behaviour of the filter.
21.- Filter of distorted signal.
22.- Filter in cascade; low pass filter and
high pass filter.
23.- Filter in parallel.
24.- Study of Error in filters.
25.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Additional Possibilities:
Band-Pass and Band-Stop Filters.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The bipolar power transistor:
1.-Study of the power transistor.
2.-Study of faults in the power transistor.
3.-Exercises.
The MOSFET transistor:
4.-Study of the MOSFET transistor.
5.-Study of faults in the MOSFET.
6.-Exercises.
The thyristor:
7.- Study of the thyristor.
8.- Study of the error of the thyristor.
9.- Exercises.
The UJT transistor and trigger circuits of the
thyristor:
10.- Study of the trigger circuits of the
thyristor.
11.- Study of insulation circuits.
12.- Exercises.
The TRIAC:
13.- Study of the TRIAC.
14.- Practical assembly of the TRIAC.
15.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Half/Full wave control.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 7
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
(continuation)
M10. Digital Systems and Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switching. The bistable, astable
and monostable family:
1.-Characteristics of an analog switch
chip.
2.-Study of the error F1 in the Analog
Multiplexer.
3.-Study of the errors in the Analog
Multiplexer.
4.-Characteristics of an S-R type Latch
Integrated circuit.
5.-Error Study in the bistable.
6.-Characteristics of an integrated
astable circuit.
7.-Error Study in the astable.
8.-Characteristics of an integrated
Monostable circuit.
9.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Behaviour of Binary/BCD Counters & 7segments Displays:
10.- Characteristics of Binary UP/DOWN
Counter 74LS193 and 7-Segment
Display.
11.- Error Study in the binary counter.
12.- C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e B C D
UP/DOWN counter and 7-Segment
Display.
13.- Error Study in the BCD counter.
14.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Comparators and analog integrators:
15.- Characteristics of an analog
comparator.
16.- Analog integrator.
17.- Error Study in the analog integrator.
18.- Triangular wave generation.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
A/D and D/A conversion:
20.- D/A Converter.
21.- A/D Converter.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Applications:
23.- Random number generator.
24.- Measuring the time between two
events.
25.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Synchronous/Asynchronous Counter.
M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Numbers systems:
1.- Voltage measurement in a circuit of
sources.
2.- Fault study in the source circuit.
3.- Exercises.
Logical circuits:
4.- Logical Diode.
5.- Fault study in Sources.
6.- Logic with transistor and diodes.
7.- Fault study in transistor/diode circuit.
8.- Exercises.
TTL gates:
9.- Basic function gates.
10.- Fault study in TTL circuit.
11.- Fault study in Logic Gates.
12.- Exercises.
CMOS gates:
13.- Basic function gates.
14.- Fault study in CMOS circuit.
15.- Exercises.
Boolean Algebra and logical functions:
16.- Study of use of Circuit #3.
17.- Exercises.
Open collector gates:
18.- Study of the use of Circuit #5.
19.- Exercises.
Others types of integrated gates:
20.- Study of simple operations with a
Schmitt Trigger inverter.
21.- Operation study of a three-state
buffer.
22.- Study of the fault in the Circuit #7.
23.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
JK Flip-Flop.
Control of Data Bus.
M12. Basic Combinational Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Encoders:
1.- Study of an encoder.
2.- Fault study in the encoder.
3.- Exercises.
Decoders:
4.- Study of a decoder.
5.- Fault study in the decoder.
6.- Exercises.
Multiplexers:
7.- Study of a multiplexer.
8.- Study of the errors in the multiplexers.
9.- Exercises.
Demultiplexers:
10.- Study of a demultiplexer.
11.- Study of the errors in demultiplexers.
12.- Exercises.
Digital Comparators:
13.- Study of a comparator.
14.- Study of the errors in a comparator.
15.- Exercises.
Arithmetic and logic operations:
16.- Study of an adder.
17.- Study of the error in the arithmetic
and logic operations.
18.- Study of a parity generator.
19.- Study of the error in the Parity
generator.
20.- Exercises.
M13. Basic Sequential Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Bistables:
1.- Bistables.
2.- Bistable S-R using NAND gates.
3.- Practical performance.
4.- Study of error in the Bistables.
5.- Exercises.
Shift registers:
6.- Shift registers.
7.- Study of faults of the Shift registers.
8.- Exercises.
Counters:
9.- Practice of the Counters.
10.- Study of faults of the Counters.
11.- Exercises.
Synchronised sequential circuits:
12.- Practice of the Synchronised.
13.- Study of errors of the Synchronised
Sequential circuits.
14.- Exercises.
Memories:
15.- Exercises.
M14. Optoelectronics
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Light transmitters and liquid crystal display
(LCD):
1.- Light transmitters.
2.- Bar graph.
3.- LCD display and 7-segment display.
4.- Fault Study in light transmitters and
liquid crystal display.
5.- Exercises.
Photo-conducting cells:
6.- Light dependent resistors.
7.- Alarm.
8.- Fault study on the photo-conducting
cell.
9.- Exercises.
Fibre optics:
10.- Fibre optics practice.
M15. Development Module
MAIN FEATURES
This is a module to build and implement
student’s own circuits, it consists on:
Development board.
Power supply connector.
Digital visual display unit.
Logical source.
Set of potentiometers.
Pulse generator and inverters.
Interrupter.
Clock.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 8
11.- Fault study using fibre optics.
12.- Exercises.
Infrared:
13.- Circuit with infrared diodes.
14.- Fault study of the infrared diodes.
15.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics:Transducers
M41. Resistance Transducers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Linearly sliding potentiometer.
2.- Rotary carbon-track potentiometer.
3.- Rotary coil potentiometer.
4.- Precision servo-potentiometer.
M43. Applications of Temperature
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- Construction of a digital thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance
(T.D.R) transducer.
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C
thermistor.
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor
used in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
thermopar.
M44. Applications of Light
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Photovoltaic Cell.
2.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.
3.- Phototransistor.
4.- Characteristics of a phototransistor.
5.- Photodiode PIN.
6.- Characteristics of a PIN photodiode.
7.- Photoconductive Cell.
8.- Luminous intensity detector.
M45. Linear Position and Force
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable
Differential Transformer (LVDT).
2.- Characteristics of a Variable
Resistance.
3.-The characteristics of a strain gauge
Transducer.
M-46. Environmental Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of Air flow Sensor.
2.- Characteristics of Air pressure
Sensor.
3.- Characteristics of Humidity Sensor.
M-47. Rotational Speed and Position Control
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a slotted opto
transducer and its applications for
counting and speed measurement.
2.- Characteristics of the reflective
opto-transducer.
3.- Characteristics of an inductive
transducer.
5.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent
Magnet tachogenerator.
4.- Characteristics of a half effect
transducer.
M-48. Sounds Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Dynamic
Microphone.
2.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic
Receiver.
3.- Theoretical/Practical questions.
M-49. Applications of Temperature and Pressure
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- C o n s t r u c t i o n o f a d i g i t a l
thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
(T.D.R) transducer.
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
thermocouple.
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C thermistor. Pressure transducer:
7.- Characteristic of a pressure
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor used
transducer.
in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 9
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics
M60. Analog/Digital Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Binary Slope Converter.
5.- Flash Converter.
2.- Integrated converter.
3.- Simple Slope Converter.
4.- Double Slope Converter.
M-61. Digital/Analog Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Weighted Resistance Converter.
5.- Pulse - Width Modulation Converter.
2.- Ladder Converter R/2R.
3.- Integrated Converter.
4.- Series Blocking Converter.
M-65. Control and Regulation
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional
block.
2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrator
block.
3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole.
4.- Study in open loop Nº4: 2nd order
plant.
5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non lineal
Plants: Limitation and Hysteresis.
6.- Study in open loop Nº 6: Block
composition: Negative zero and
Negative Pole.
7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.1st
order system.
8.-Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.
2nd order system.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities
M-99. Expansion Board
Example of an electronic
sub-board put in the
M99 Board
The aim of the M99 Expansion Board is to
provide generic support to up to 8
electronic sub-boards, each one with its
own specific functionality, customized to
client necessities.
The sub-boards have to be inserted in any of
the eight 32-pin female connectors
reserved for it on the M99 Board.
There are connectors, in both the subboards and on the M99, through which one
can access the internal input/output data
points, to take measures and get
information about the practice. Thus, the
student carries out the pedagogical aims.
In the upper right corner of the M99 board
there are 14 connectors for power supply.
Thanks to them, the sub-boards can be
supplied with different voltage intensities.
Either ”FA-CO” Power Supply or “EBC100” Base unit with built-in power supply,
are required to work with the M99
Expansion Board, like with any other
Module.
- Some electronic sub-boards already
developed:
M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
M99-3. Function Generator.
M99-4. AM Modulator.
M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can design and include any
electronic circuit or application on a
sub-board according to customer
requirements. This way, any
Modules can be complemented with
extra circuits, in extra sub-boards.
The sub-boards can also be
purchased independently to the
modules, thus giving total
freedom to customers in the
acquisition of circuits.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 10
9.-Potentiometer adjustment.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
Software
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software (M../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
information on the subject of study.
+
Module
(electronic board)
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
M../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the circuits and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
-M8/SOF. Filters.
-M9/SOF. Power Electronics.
-M10/SOF. Digital Systems and Converters.
-M11/SOF. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
-M12/SOF. Basic Combinational Circuits.
-M13/SOF. Basic Sequential Circuits.
-M14/SOF. Optoelectronics.
-M15/SOF. Development Module.
Basic Electronic: Transducers:
-M41/SOF. Resistance transducers.
-M43/SOF. Applications of Temperature.
Basic electricity
-M1/SOF. Direct Current Circuits(D.C.).
-M2/SOF. Alternating Current Circuits(A.C.).
-M16/SOF. Electric Networks.
-M17/SOF. Electromagnetism.
Basic Electronic:
-M3/SOF. Semiconductors I.
-M4/SOF. Semiconductors II.
-M5/SOF. Power Supplies.
-M6/SOF. Oscillators.
-M7/SOF. Operational Amplifiers.
4
-M44/SOF. Applications of light.
-M45/SOF. Linear Position and Force.
-M46/SOF. Environmental Measurement .
-M47/SOF. Rotational Speed and Position Control.
-M48/SOF. Sound Measurements.
-M49/SOF. Applications of Temperature and Pressure.
Basic Electronic: Control Electronics:
-M60/SOF. Analog/Digital Converters.
-M61/SOF. Digital/Analog Converters.
-M65/SOF. Control and Regulation.
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
On the Basic Electronics Area, it can be used with the M1 to M17 modules. These modules cover every subject in Basic Electricity and Electronics, both analog and digital.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single
click CAL will perform the calculations.
Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It provides a handy option to avoid using different
reference sources while in progress. For example: the
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right
names, conversion factors...
...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
tables.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 11
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
5
1
2
Connection
points
4
Cables to
interface
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System
Data acquisition
and virtual
instrumentation
software
3
“n”
Module
(electronic board)
Data acquisition
interface box
Cable
to
computer
Data acquisition
board
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Student
post
EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the electronic modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS
system, information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
represented.
We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
them.
This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF:
5.1)Hardware:
5.1.1)DAIB. Data Acquisition Interface Box:
Steel box. Dimensions: 310 x 220 x 145 mm. approx.
Front panel:
16 Analog inputs.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital inputs/outputs, configurable as inputs or outputs.
Digital signal simulator. Analog signal simulator.
Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer.
Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board).
Connecting cables.
5.1.2) DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in a
computer slot.
For EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version:
Analog inputs: 16. Sampling rate up to:
1,250,000 S/s.
Analog outputs: 2.
Digital Input/Output: 24 inputs/outputs.
For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
This is a similar version to the 1.25, with t h e
only difference that for this one, the sampling
rate to 250,000 S/s .
DAB
5.2) EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software:
It works as:
-Digital oscilloscope.
-Multimeter.
DAIB
-Function generator.
-Spectrum analyzer.
-Transient recorder.
-Logic analyzer
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different inputs and outputs.
It stores acquired data in a file (16 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 24 digital inputs/outputs at the same
time) for further analysis. Print screens and reports of the signals at any time. Quick capture in a period of
time and posterior representation. Two signal generators, independent for sinusoidal, triangular, saw and
square. Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
Measurement, analysis, visualization, representation and report of results. All 16 input channels could be
scaled to compare signal with different voltage levels.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 12
issue:01/11
SENSORS INSTRUMENTATION
Ref: 0231
ITEM
1 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
SPC
WEIGHING SYSTEM,COMPUTER CONTROLLED
1
2
SPC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
WEIGHING SYSTEM (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
3
SCSP
PRESSURE SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM
1
4
SCSP/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
PRESSURE SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
5
SCST
TEMPERATURE SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM
1
6
SCST/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
TEMPERATURE SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
7
SCSCN
FLOW AND LEVEL SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM
1
8
SCSCN/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR FLOW
AND LEVEL SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
9
0231PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
10
0231PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
11
0231IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
12
0230CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
13
0230TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
14
0231MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0231
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.3-Basic
Transducers
and Sensors
2.1Electronics
(continuation)
Arm for balance with
counterbalance
2.- Electronics
SPC. Computer Controlled Weighing System
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
Upper view
Force Sensor
detail
2
Device for
the tray
coupling
1
Unit: SPC. Weighing System
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
SPC Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Stainless steel arm for balance. Counterbalance of 0.5 and 1 Kg. Anodized aluminium tray. High precision force sensor of 010N.
2 SPC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 SPC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 700x400x400 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
1.- Sensor Calibration.
2.- Hysteresis study.
3.- Weight high precission measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/SPC.pdf
SCSP. Pressure Sensors Calibration System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Bench-top unit.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Main metallic elements in stainless steel.
Diagram in the front panel.
Vacuum-meter of range (-9800 [ mmH2O] to 0).
Vacuum-meter of range (-1000 [ mmH2O] to 0).
Manometer of range (0 to 1000 [ mmH2O] ).
Manometer of range (0 to 2,5 [ bars]).
Mobile Piston (syringe).
8 valves.
Non-return valve.
Polyurethane tubes.
This system is supplied with atm, bares, psi, mmHg, mmH2O, conversion
tables.
This system allows the calibration of 6 sensors (same type) simultaneously.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =720 x 300 x 570 mm. Weight: 15 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electronics/transducerssensors/SCSP.pdf
Page 23
www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
CONTROL ELECTRONICS MODULE
Ref: 0240
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
RYC
RYC.Unit
DAB
RYC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF REGULATION
AND CONTROL, COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF REGULATION
AND CONTROL INCLUDING THE CONTROL INTERFACE
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TEACHING EQUIPMENT
FOR STUDY OF REGULATION AND CONTROL
QTY.
1
1
1
1
2
RYC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
REGULATION AND CONTROL (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
1
3
CADDA
TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF A/D AND
D/A CONVERTERS, COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED
BY:
TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF A/D AND D/A
CONVERTERS INCLUDING CONTROL INTERFACE
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION+ DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TEACHING EQUIPMENT
FOR STUDY OF A/D AND D/A CONVERTERS
1
CADDA Unit
DAB
CADDA/CCSOF
1
1
1
4
CADDA/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR A/D
AND D/A CONVERTERS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
5
0240PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
0240PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
0240IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
8
0240CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
0240TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
0240MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
10
Ref: 0240
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.4- Control Electronics
RYC. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation and Control
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System
Control
Interface
included
in the unit
2
1
Unit: RYC. Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation
and Control, including Control Interface
Data
Acquisition
Board
4 Cables and Accessories
5 Manuals
3
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
RYC Unit:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Steel box. 3 Modules of Controller of 1st Order. 3 Modules of Integrator. 2 Modules of Inverter Amplifier.
Module of Inverter Reductor. Module of Negative Zero. Module of Positive Zero. Module of Hysteresis.
Module of Limiter. Module of Controller of 2nd Order. Module of Adding.14 Capacitors from 1mF to 100mF.
6 Diodes. 34 Operational Amplifiers. 33 Potentiometers.186 Resistances. 2 Transistors. On/Off switch.
Fuse. Connector to PC. Control Interface.
2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
3 RYC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible,
open and multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on
all process parameters. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to
250,000 data per second. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process and modification
of the conditions during the process.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
1
1.-Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional Block.
2.-Study in open loop Nº2: Integrative Block.
3.-Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole.
4.-Study in open loop Nº4: Second order plants.
5.-Study in open loop Nº5: Non-line plants: Limitation
and Hysteresis.
6.- Study in open loop Nº6: Blocks Composition:
Negative Zero and Negative Pole.
7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by means of
Quantitative Optimum 1st order system.
8.- Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by means of
Quantitative Optimum 2nd order system.
Other practical possibilities:
Analog regulators procedure: (9-11):
9.-First order filter.
10.-Integral regulator.
11.-Regulating I+P with phase advance in the feedback.
12.-Potentiometer adjustment.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/control/RYC.pdf
CADDA. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Analog/Digital (A/D) and Digital/Analog (D/A) Converters
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System
Control
Interface
included
in the unit
1
Unit: CADDA. Teaching Unit for the Study of A/D and D/A
Converters, including Control Interface.
2
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
4 Cables and Accessories
5 Manuals
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
CADDA Unit:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Steel box.
In this unit, the elements are separated in two parts: lefthand part for analog to digital conversions, and
right hand part for digital to analog conversions.
Analog/Digital converter board. Digital/Analog converter board.
Signal generator board, with 100 to 330 mF capacitors, 10 to 50K potentiometers and 1 to 100K
resistors.
Female and male connectors, interconnections.
Power supply.
LPF-Low Pass Filter: 2nd order low pass filter, needed to convert analog signals to digital. Sample/Hold
module. Comparator module. Clock module. Analog switch. Ramp module. A/D control module. D/A
module, including an integrated digital to analog converter. A/D module, including an integrated
analog to digital converter. Counter module. Waveform generator. 8 analog switches, all are managed
by a PC. Weighted resistors: 8 resistances are connected to a common point. D/A module: same
module than described before “D/A”. Analog input and output for PC. Serial lock 1 module. Adding
module: same module as previously described ”Adding”. Serial lock 2 module: same module than serial
lock 1, but based only on an inverter. R/2R : stair of resistance R/2R. Potentiometer. D/A control module.
Operational amplifier. Two capacities of 100nF with common connection.Sample/Hold module: same
module as previously described “Sample/Hold”.
Control Interface.
2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.
Sampling rate up to:250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
3 CADDA/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible,
open and multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously
on all process parameters. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling
velocity up to 250,000 data per second. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process
and modification of the conditions during the process.
4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 450 x 470 mm. Weight: 40 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/control/CADDA.pdf
Page 24
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Sampling theorem.
2.- Analog/Digital integrated converter. Monopolar
assembly.
3.- Analog/Digital integrated converter. Bipolar assembly.
4.- Monopolar binary ramp converter.
5.- Quantification effects.
6.-Bipolar binary ramp converter.
7.-Binary ramp converter with continuous monopolar
counting.
8.-Binary ramp converter with bipolar continuous
counting.
9.-Monopolar simple ramp.
10.- Bipolar simple ramp converter.
11.- Monopolar double ramp converter.
12.- Double bipolar ramp converter.
13.- Monopolar converter of successive approximations.
14.- Bipolar converter of successive approximations.
15.- Integrated Digital/Analog converter. Monopolar
assembly.
16.- Digital/Analog integrated converter. Bipolar assembly.
17.- Digitalization and reconstruction of monopolar signals.
18.- Digitalization and reconstruction of bipolar signals.
19.-Digital/Analog monopolar converter of weighted
resistance.
20.- Digital/Analog bipolar converter of weighted
resistance.
21.- Analog switches errors.
22.- R/2R monopolar stair converter.
23.- R/2R bipolar stair converter.
24.-Current division in R/2R stairs.
25.-Digital/Analog converter of monopolar inverted stair.
26.-Digital/Analog bipolar converter of inverted stair.
27.-Digital/Analog monopolar converter of series blocking.
28.-Digital/Analog bipolar converter of series blocking.
29.-Digital/Analog converter of load balance.
30.-Bipolar Digital/Analog converter of load balance.
31.-Monopolar Digital/Analog converter of pulse width
modulation.
32.-Digital/Analog bipolar converter of pulse width
modulation.
issue:01/11
DOMESTIC ELECTRIC INSTALLATIONS (20 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0413-410/20S
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 3
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIELBA
"DOMESTIC " ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
1
AD1A
ALI02
ALI03
DET27
INT32
SEL03
SEL21
VAR07
ROBBERY ALARM STATION,INCLUDED:
DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).
GLASS BREAK DETECTOR.
INTRUSION SWITCH/DETECTOR WITH RELAY 1000W.
3-PILOTS LIGHTS.
INDOOR SIREN.
KIT: BURGLAR ALARM CENTRAL + INFRARED ELE.
+ BATTERY.
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
AD1/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - BASIC ROBBERY ALARM STATION.
20
3
AD1/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - BASIC ROBBERY ALARM STATION.
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
4
AD3A
ALI02
ALI03
ALA02
DET06
DET21
FIRE ALARM STATION, INCLUDED:
DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).
FIRE ALARM STATION (WITH BATTERY).
SMOKE DETECTOR FOR DOMESTIC CONTROL.
FIRE DETECTOR THROUGH IONIZATION FOR
CENTRAL.
INDOOR SIREN.
1
1
1
1
1
1
SEL21
1
5
AD3/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - BASIC FIRE ALARM STATION
20
6
AD3/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - BASIC FIRE ALARM STATION.
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
7
AD5
APPLICATION - TEMPORIZATION OF STAIRS,
INCLUDED
DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
AUTOMATIC OF STAIRS
SWITCH + COMMUTATOR GROUP + BELL PUSHBUTTON.
2 LAMP-HOLDERS + INCANDESCENT LAMPS 40 W.
2 LOW CONSUMPTION FLUORESCENT LAMPS.
1
ALI02
CTI10
INT21
LAM08
LAM13
1
1
1
2
2
8
AD5/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - TEMPORIZATION OF STAIRS
20
9
AD5/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - TEMPORIZATION OF STAIRS.
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
AD33
ALI02
COM14
ENC09
INSTALLATIONS FAULTS SIMULATOR,INCLUDED:
DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
2 COMMUTATORS.
2-POLE EUROPEAN SOCKET WITH SAFETY DEVICE.
1
1
2
2
10
Ref: 0413-410/20S
ITEM
2 / 3
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
10
COM21
LAM08
LAM09
MED65
FUS04
INVERTER + GROUP OF 2 COMMUTATORS.
2 LAMP-HOLDERS + INCANDESCENT LAMPS 40 W.
FLUORESCENT LAMP.
DIGITAL MULTIMETER.
3 FUSE-HOLDERS 10 A, 230 VAC (INCLUDE
2,4,6,10 A).
2
2
1
1
1
11
AD33/SOF*
SOFTWARE DE ENSEÑANZA ASISTIDO DESDE
COMPUTADOR (PC) SIMULADOR DE FALLOS EN
INSTALACIONES ELECTRICAS
20
12
AD33/CAL
SOFWARE DE APRENDIZAJE ASISTIDO DESDE
COMPUTADOR PARA CIRCUITOS C.C. (CÁLCULO Y
ANÁLISIS DE RESULTADOS) POR SIMULADOR DE
FALLOS EN INSTALACIONES ELECTRICAS
20
13
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
14
MUAD
1
EPIB
DAB
MUAD/SOF
ELECTRIC POWER DATA ACQUISITION
SYSTEM,INCLUDED:
ELECTRIC POWER INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
15
CABD
CABLES KIT
1
16
0410PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
17
0410PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
18
0410IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
19
0410CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
20
0410TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
21
0410MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0413-410/20S
3 / 3
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 20 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
1
APPLICATIONS
Frame
2
(applications support)
(AD1A)
(AI1)
(BASB)
Modules automatic
anchorage system
High Safety
(AD3A)
APPLICATIONS
Automatic earth
connection system
(AI2)
Sight of the frame with some modules
allocated
or
(BASS)
(AD5)
(AI4)
(AI5)
(AD6A)
3
4.- Electricity
Sight of the frame
with some modules allocated
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
(AD8)
INS/SOF.
(AE7)
Teacher Software
EMT../SOF.
Student/Module Software
(AD9A)
4
(AE8)
MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
Teaching
Technique
used
EPIB. Electric power
interface box
(AD13)
(AE9)
DAB. Data adquisition board
MUAD/SOF. Power Data
acquisition System
5
Manuals
Other APPLICATIONS
TOTALLY
SAFETY SYSTEM
Other APPLICATIONS
The complete laboratory includes part 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 ,and any part can be supplied individually or additionally.
Minimum supply: Frame (BASB or BASS) + one Application + Manuals.
Available Applications:
! Domestic Electric Installations:
AD1A. Robbery alarm station.
AD3A. Fire alarm station.
AD5. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A. Luminosity control station.
AD8. Blinds activator.
AD9A. Heating control station.
AD11A. Network analyzer.
AD13. Audio door entry system.
AD14. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A. Position control station.
AD17A. Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24. Position Switch.
AD19A. Sound station.
AD22. Flooding control station.
AD23. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A. C o n t r o l s t a t i o n f o r
domestic electric services
through the telephone.
AD28A. Integral control station of
domestic electric systems.
AD30. Gas control station.
AD31. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
! Industrial Electric Installations:
AI1. Star-delta starter.
AI2. S t a r t e r t h r o u g h a u t o transformer.
AI3. Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4. Starter-inverter.
AI5. AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6. DC motor starter.
AI7. Automatic change of speed
of a Dahlander motor with
change of direction.
AI8. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical contacts
in TT neutral regimen.
AI10. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11. People safety against indirect electrical
contacts in IT neutral regimen.
AI12. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1. Aerial line model.
AE2. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3. Test unit for magneto-thermal automatic
switches.
AE4. Test unit for differential automatic switches.
AE5. Relay control station.
AE6. Energy counters control station.
AE7. Multi-functional electrical protection
station.
AE8. Power & torque measurements of
electrical motors.
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth fault detection.
Directional power flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 37
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
1
(continuation)
(continuation)
Frame
Applications support. There are two options to chose:
BAS-B. Basic Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Possibility of housing up to 10 different modules.
Automatic anchorage system for any module.
Automatic earth connection system.
or
BASS. Double Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Double frame, single side working post.
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Dimensions approx.:1300mm x 800mm x 700mm.
Possibility of housing until 12 different modules at the same
time. Transparent internal separation. Automatic anchorage
system for any module. Automatic earth connection system.
Dimensions: 1300x800x700mm. approx. Weight:
2
Applications
Main features:
Painted steel modules. All modules have handles and diagram. Automatic anchorage system for housing the modules in the frame. Automatic earth connection in the
modules. Safety connections. Safety wires.
There is a manual for each application (8 manuals normally supplied).
Domestic Electrical Installations
AD1A. Robbery Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET27. Glass Break Detector.
INT32. Intrusion Switch/Detector with Relay 1000W. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
VAR07. Kit: Burglar Alarm Central + infrared ele. + battery.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with intrusion detector and alarm.
2.- Assembly of the station with glass breaking detector and
alarm.
3.- Assembly of the station with both types of detectors and alarm.
4.- Assembly of the station with infrared detectors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD1A.pdf
AD3A. Fire Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALA02. Fire Alarm Station (with battery).
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET21. Fire Detector through Ionization for Central.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET22. Fire Thermal Detector.
SEL17. Fire Indicators, Bell type.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with fire detector, smoke detector and
alarm.
2.- Test of the station with fire detector.
3.- Test of the station with smoke detector.
4.- Test of the station with detection of fire by the thermal detector.
5.- Activation of the electro-valve following the detection of the
fire.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD5. Temporization of Stairs
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
CTI10. Automatic of Stairs.
INT21. Switch+Commutator Group+Bell Push-Button.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM13. 2 Low Consumption Fluorescent Lamps. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the basic set of temporization.
2.- Test of the set from two points with incandescent lamps.
3.- Test of the set from two points with fluorescent lamps.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD5.pdf
AD6A. Luminosity Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
REG06. Voltage Electronic Regulator (Switch) 40 to 300W/230Vac.
INT18. 1-pole Switch + 1-pole Switch with Light.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD6A.pdf
Page 38
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.-
Assembly of the control station.
Control of luminosity of an halogen lamp.
Control of luminosity of an incandescent lamp.
Test of the station by movement sensor.
Luminosity control.
Complete control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD8. Blinds Activator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT22. 2 Switches for Blinds.
DET19. Twilight Detector.
DET20. Light Detector.
VAR01. Motor for Blinds / Curtains.
PUL29. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (without Interlock).
PUL30. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (with Interlock).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the activator (motor, detectors and switches).
2.- Blind activation by pulsators (push-buttons).
3.- Blind activation by sensors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD9A. Heating Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
MED76. Thermostat for Heating.
MED77. Thermostat for Heating and Refrigeration.
SEL09. 2 Double Luminous Signalling red-green 230Vac. (2 units).
TIM01. 2 Bell 70dB,230V. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the heating control station.
2.- Assembly of the heating and refrigeration control.
3.- Test with several temperatures.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
MED11. AC Ammeter (0-10A).
MED25. Pointer Frequency Meter(45-65Hz).
MED32. 1-Phase Wattmeter 230V.
MED21. AC Voltmeter (0-250V).
MED30. 1-Phase Phasemeter 230V.
MED38. 1-Phase Varmeter 230V.
MED12. AC Ammeter (custom made). (3 units).
MED22. AC Voltmeter (0-400V). (3 units).
MED31. 3-Phase Phasemeter 400V. (3 units).
MED39. 3-Phase Balanced Varmeter 440V.
MED33. 3-Phase Balanced Wattmeter 440V.
MED63. Synchronoscope.
MED64. Phase Sequence Indicator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 220V single-phase circuit.
2.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 380V three-phase circuit.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD13. Audio Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR01. Phones Power Supply.
POR02. Phone.
POR03. Interphone.
POR06. Lock.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check the interphone operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD14. Audio and Video Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR06. Lock.
POR05. Phone/Monitor.
POR04. Video Camera.
POR07. Digital Station.
POR08. Video-Interphone Power Supply.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check of the video and audio operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD14.pdf
AD15A. Position Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
INT14. 1-pole 2 Switches.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
SEN04. Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor type PNP.
SEN14. AC Cylindrical Capacitive Proximity Sensor.
SEN29. AC Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor.
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-Switch.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the station with sensors.
Test of the capacitive detection of a body.
Test of the inductive position detection of a body.
Assembly of the station with presence and movement wall
sensor.
5.- To check the movement detection of a body.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD17A. Photoelectric Control Position Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
LAM04. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (24Vac). (2 units).
SEN18. Cylindrical Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN19. Miniature Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN20. Compact Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN21. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN22. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
SEN23. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN24. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Assembly of the control station.
Test of the detection with cylindrical sensor.
Test of the detection with miniature sensor.
Test of the detection with compact sensor.
Assembly of the control station with battery and sensors.
Test of the detection with emitters and receivers.
Test with only emitters and receptors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 39
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
AD11A. Network Analyzer
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD24. Position Switch
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply.
LAM03. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (220Vac).
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-switch.
SEN02. MBB Micro-switch.
SEN03. BBM Micro-switch.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Instantaneous Micro-switch.
2.- MBB Micro-switch.
3.- BBM Micro-switch.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD19A. Sound Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
AUD01. Analog Sound Regulator.
AUD04. Speaker of 2”, 2W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD06. Basic Audio Central.
AUD20. Analog Sound Regulator (mono-stereo).
AUD02. Digital Sound Regulator.
AUD05. Speaker of 4”, 7W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD03. Warnings Emitter Module.
AUD08. Background Music Regulator 3W.
AUD10. Double Background Music Regulator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Mono-stereo system installation.
Mono system with warnings reception.
Mono-stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Background Music installation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD22. Flooding Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET11. Probe for Water Electro-valve. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the flooding control with a probe.
2.- Test of the flooding control.
3.- Test of the flooding control acting on an eletro-valve.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD23. Wireless Basic Control Station (RF)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Wireless intrusion detection and alarm.
2.- Wireless panic button alarm.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD25A. Control Station for Domestic Electric Services through the Telephone
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR01. Basic Control Module.
DET01. Flooding Detector.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector). (3units).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
VAR05. Tones Dialling Telephone.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Smoke detection.
Gas detection and electro-valve control.
Flooding detection and electro-valve control.
Temperature and Battery.
Intrusion detection.
Wireless detection.
Complete control of home electric services through the
telephone.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD28A. Integral Control Station of Domestic Electric Systems
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR02. Advanced Control Module.
CTR05. Power Module 72W.
CTR07. Timers Module.
CTR08. Inputs Module 24V.
CTR11. Outputs Module 24V.
CTR17. Infrared Remote Control for Control Modules.
CTR18. Infrared Receptor.
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET09. Intrusion Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
VAR08. Monitor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD28A.pdf
Page 40
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the complete system with
the smoke,
flooding and gas detectors.
2.- Test of the station with smoke, flooding and gas
detectors.
3.- To set the temporization and monitoring the results.
4.- Assembly of the complete system with infrared and
instrusion detectors.
5.- Test of the station with infrared and instrusion
detectors.
6.- Electro-valves activation.
7.- Wireless assembly of the sensor through infrared
control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
AD30. Gas Control Station
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET02. Gas Detector.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Gas detection.
2.- Electro-valve activation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD31. Movement and Sound Detection and Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT15. 2 Switches with Light.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
INT31. Intrusion Switch/Detector from 40 to 300W.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
PUL22. 2 Light Push-Buttons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Movement and sound detection controlled by switches.
2.- Movement and sound detection controlled by pulsators.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
MED04. DC Milliammeter (0-600 mA).
MED05. DC Ammeter (0-1.5A).
MED08. AC Milliammeter (0-600mA).
MED09. AC Ammeter (0-2.5A).
MED15. DC Voltmeter (0-5V).
MED16. DC Voltmeter (0-50V).
MED19. AC Voltmeter (0-10V).
MED20. AC Voltmeter (0-60V).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
4.- Electricity
AD32. 24vac/12vdc Circuits Analyzer
1.- AC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
2.- DC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD33. Installations Faults Simulator
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators (2 units).
ENC09. 2-pole European Socket with Safety Device.(2 units).
COM21.Inverter + Group of 2 Commutators. (2 units).
LAM01. Lamps.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
MED65. Digital Multimeter.
FUS04. 3 Fuse-holders 10A, 230Vac (include 2, 4,6,10A).
Fault box.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.-
Ground fault simulation of a plug base.
Fault simulation between phases of a plug base.
Ground fault simulation of an incandescent lamp base.
Ground fault simulation of a fluorescent lamp base.
Fault simulation between phases of an incandescent lamp
base.
To simulate fault of power-supply contact in the lamp base.
To simulate fault of contact of the switch.
To simulate fault of contact of the fuse.
To simulate fault of contact of the fluorescent base.
Industrial Electrical Installations
AI1. Star-Delta Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac. (3 units)).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the starter.
Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
Measurement of the star current and delta current.
Direct start of the motor. Measurement of the starting current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI2 Starter through Auto-transformer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
TRA14. 3-Phase Auto-transformer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
3.- Measurement of both the star and delta current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI3. Speed Commutator for Dahlander Motor
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the commutator.
2.- Test of the commutator changing the speed of a Dahlander
motor.
3.- Measurement of the voltage and current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 41
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications (continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI4. Starter-Inverter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
CON11. 3-pole Contactor- Inverter (220Vac).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL03. Push-Buttons with Light (220Vac).(2 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test of the direct start of a squirrel cage motor.
3.- To invert the rotation direction of the motor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI5. AC Wound Rotor Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
VAR06. Motor (EMT8) (wound rotor).
CAR22. AC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test the starter changing the resistances step by step.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
4.- Electricity
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI6. DC Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
VAR04. Motor (EMT5) (DC motor).
CAR23. DC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON03. 3-pole Contactor (12Vdc).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
CAR20. Diodes and Thyristors.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starter.
2.- Starter rheostat.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI7. Automatic Change of Speed of a Dahlander Motor with Change of Direction
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAM24. 3-pole+neutral Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 6A,
Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (5 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A). (2 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NC Contacts). (5 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NO Contacts). (5 units).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set.
2.- Motor starting with right turning direction at high speed. R.p.m
and consumption measurements.
3.- Motor stop and change to left the turning direction at high
speed.
4.- Change to low speed.
5.- Motor stop and change to right the turning direction.
6.- Change to high speed. R.p.m and consumption
measurements.
AI8. Reactive Power Compensation (Power Factor Correction)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02.
Domestic Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load,150 ohm, 500W.
CAR09. Capacitive Load 4 x 7 mF.
CAR12. Inductive Load 0-33-78-140-193-236 mH. (2 units).
MED60B.Network Analyzer with active and reactive energy counters.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AI8.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Measurement of active power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of apparent power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of power factor of a receiver.
Measurement of active energy consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive energy consumed by a receiver.
Compensation of reactive energy (improvement of the power
factor).
8.- Comparison of the active energy consumed after the
compensation.
9.- Comparison of the reactive energy consumed after the
compensation.
10.-Measurement of power factor after the compensation.
AI9. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR05. Double Variable Resistive Load , 150 ohm, 500 W.
Resistance 1600 W.
COM12.Commutator/Switch.
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD13. 3-pole + neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 25A,
300mA, class AC, instantaneous.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of an isolation fault in TT neutral regimen.
2.- Structure of a differential switch. Necessity to use a differential
switch.
3.- Study of the selectivity among differential switches.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI10. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TN Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
COM12.Commutator/Switch. (2 units).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
Resistance 200 W.
Resistance 100 W, 72W.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 42
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Study of an isolation fault in TN neutral regimen.
Measurement of the ground loop impedances.
Indirect contact with defect mass.
The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-C conditions.
5.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-S conditions.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI11. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in IT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
INT01. 1-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
INT02. 2-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
CPA.
Isolation Permanent Controller.
Capacitor 300V. 200 nF .(2 units).
Resistance 100 W.
Resistance 10 W.
2.- Study of an isolation double fault
(only with one mass).
More information in:
4.- Operation of the isolation controller.
1.- Study of an isolation simple fault.
5.- Study of the ground loop impedance.
3.- Study with several masses.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
A12. Modular Trainer (AC Motors)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI12.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through contactor, with some
stop and start push-buttons.
2.- Configuration of a magnetic
protection system, with stop mush
room button.
3.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with a switch.
4.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through impulses contactor.
5.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with pushbuttons and signalling.
6.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with two
boxes of push-buttons and
signalling.
7.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor stopping before turning
in the opposite direction.
8.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor without stopping before
turning in the opposite direction.
9.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
phase motor with microswitch and
push-buttons box.
10.- Star-delta starting with an turn
inverter of a three-phase motor.
11.- Automatic star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
12.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor with microswitch, with
start push-buttons, stop and
function cycle. (Direct).
13.- Manual star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
14.- Control of a single phase motor
direct and, with time-delay
connection and disconnection.
15.- Starting of a three-phase motor with
single- phase voltage.
16.- Motor speed control with a variator.
17.-Parameters of the motor through
software.
18.-Control of a two-speeds Dahlander
motor.
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI10. Power Supply Module
CAR30. Inductances Module
CAR31. Capacitors Module
CAR32. Rectifier Diodes Module
CAR33 .Resistive Components Module
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp
LAM26. Lighting Module
MED65.Digital Multimeter
REL50. Relays Module.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage)
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
TRA28. Three-phase transformer
VAR16. Electromagnetism Kits with group of
motor/generator
VAR17. Dismantled transformer kit
VAR18. Electrostatic kit
VAR25. Open Universal Motor.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI13.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Estatic Electricity:
1.- Static electricity checking,with an
electroscope and anelectrometer.
2.- Static electricity experiments.
Direct current (DC) and Alternating Current
(AC):
3.- Ohm´s law verification.
4.- Installation of the resistive components
module.
5.- Total resistance of a circuit in series.
6. Resistance of a circuit in parallel.
7.- Power measurement of a resistive
circuit.
8.- Total resistance of a circuit in series/in
parallel.
9.- Connection of lamps in series.
10.-Lamps in parallel.
11.-Analysis of the variable resistances
response curve.
12.-Voltage divider analysis.
13.-Lamp with variable lighting.
14.-Simplification systems: Application of
Kirchhoff´s first law. Application of
Kirchhoff´s second law. Thevenin´s
and Norton´s Theorem.
15.-Application of the superposition
theorem.
16.-Resistive circuits in delta.
17.-Measurement and visualization of the
alternating current.
18.-Measurement of the phase angle
among voltages (AC).
Dynamic Electricity:
19.- Identification of the components of the
trainer.
20.-Preparation of the power supply and of
the measurement instruments
Electric capacity:
21.-Load and unload analysis of a
capacitor.
Magnetism, Electromagnetism and
Electromagnetic induction:
22.-Electromagnetic Induction.
23.-Electromagnetic Induction.
24.- Electromagnet: Oersted's experiment.
25.- The electromagnetic field (Electromagnets).
Motors:
26.-Electric motors
27.-Generators.
Page 43
28.-Identification, coils measurement
and starting-up of a single-phase
motor.
29.-Identification, measurement and
starting-up of an universal motor.
30.-Identification, coils measuremt and
starting-up of a three phase motor.
Transformers:
31.-Experiments and practices with a
dismantled transformer.
32.-Identification of the three-phase
transformer.
33.-Connection as single-phase
transformer.
34.-Star/star three-phase connection.
35.-Reverse star/star three-phase
connection .
36.-Direct delta/delta three-phase
connection.
37.-Star/delta three-phase connection.
38.-Three-phase/six-phase connection.
39.-Transformer with coils in series in
phase.
RL, RC and RCL Circuits:
40.-Analysis of a RL circuit in series.
41.-Analysis of a RL circuit in parallel.
42.-Analysis of a RC circuit in series.
43.-Analysis of a RC circuit in parallel.
44.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in series.
45.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in parallel.
Rectification and filtrate:
46.-Analysis of the rectifier diode
response curve.
47.-Half wave rectification .
48.-Rectification to feed the universal
motor.
49.-Double wave rectification with two
windings.
50.-Double wave with a Graezt's bridge.
51.-Half wave three-phase rectification.
52.-Three-phase rectification in bridge.
Electric circuits:
53.-Basic electric installation with lamps.
54.-Lamps controlled from two points
and from three points.
55.-Lamps control by a switch relay.
56.-Lamps control by a commutato relay.
57.-Installation of a fluorescent tube
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
PUL48. 3 Double Chamber Push-buttons. (2
units).
LAM02. Auxiliary Lamps(3 lamps.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (4 units).
VAR09. Frequency variator.
REL30. Synchronization Relay (variable delay).
REL47. Thermal relay (GV protector) module
(2 units).
REL45. Module with disjunctor.
IAM31. 4-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic
Switch,4A,Curve C
FUS10. Module with 3 fuse-holders and power
fuses.
TRA06. 3-Phase Power Transformer (custom
made).
CAR10. Capacitive Load (custom made).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations
AE1. Aerial Line Model
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
TRA05. 3-Phase Power Transformer 220/127V, 1000VA.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
TRA18. Petersen Coil.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Assembly of the set.
Measurement of the voltage without loads.
Measurement of the voltage with loads.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
Fault to earth and measurement of the current through the
Petersen coil.
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set with inductive load.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
To calculate the necessary capacitors to get cos j= 1.
Capacitors connection and power factor measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE1.pdf
AE2. Reactive Energy Control and Compensation
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE2.pdf
AE3. Test Unit for Magneto-thermal Automatic Switches
4.- Electricity
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
IAM13. 2-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 1A, Curve C.
TRA19. Transformer for Experiments (custom made).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the set.
2.- To simulate a high current (thermal) and to test if the automatic
switch breaks.
3.- To measure the current and to check the tripping.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE4. Test Unit for Differential Automatic Switches
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To simulate a fault to earth and to test if the differential breaks.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE5. Relay Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
REL23. Overcurrent Relay and Fault to Earth.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the transformers to line.
2.- To connect the protection relay.
3.- To simulate a line fault and the relay will trip the circuit breaker.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE6. Energy Counters Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR01. Fixed Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500 W.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
MED72. Energy Counter.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the voltage and current transformers.
2.- To measure the energy consumed by the load with the energy
counter.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE6.pdf
AE7. Multi-Functional Electrical Protection Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
REL22. Multi-function Protection Relay ( software included).
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with the relay.
2.- To simulate faults in the line.
3.- To simulate under and/or overvoltage, changing the line
parameters.
4.- To check if the relay trips the contactor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE8. Power & Torque Measurements of Electrical Motors
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
REL08. Time Electronic Relay against Overcurrents (0.3-1.5A).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
FREND. Dynamo Brake.
TECNEL/T. Tachodynamo.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 44
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set and to start the motor and dynamo.
2.- To change the dynamo current and to measure both the power
and the torque of the motor.
3.- To obtain the efficiency curve.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations (continuation)
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth Fault Detection. Directional Power Flow Detection. Reactive Power Flow Detection
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-Phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CON01. 3-Pole Contactor (24Vac).
CAR11. 3-Phase Capacitive Load.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
REL20. 1-Phase Directional Relay.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set.
Directional relay tripping test, in a case of an earth fault.
To test the tripping when power flows in the opposite direction.
To test the tripping when the reactive power is over or under
certain limit.
More information in: http://www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Software
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between application/ module and computer, this
complete package consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with
the Student/Application Software (A.../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the
teacher knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the
students. These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with
all the information on the subject of study.
+
Application
(several modules)
Instructor
Software
Student/Application
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the applications, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
A.../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Application
Software).
It explains how to use the applications, run the experiments and what to do at any
moment.
Each application has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the
applications, showing how to complete the exercises and practices.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Applications Software Packages:
! Domestic Electrical Installations:
AD1A/SOF. Robbery alarm Station.
AD3A/SOF. Fire alarm station.
AD5/SOF. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A/SOF. L u m i n o s i t y c o n t r o l
station.
AD8/SOF. Blinds activator.
AD9A/SOF. Heating control station.
AD11A/SOF. Network analyzer.
AD13/SOF. A u d i o d o o r e n t r y
system.
AD14/SOF. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A/SOF. Position control station.
AD17A/SOF.Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24/SOF. Position Switch.
AD19A/SOF.Sound station.
AD22/SOF. Flooding control station.
AD23/SOF. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A/SOF.Control station for domestic
electric services through the
telephone.
AD28A/SOF.Integral control station of
domesticelectric systems.
AD30/SOF. Gas control station.
AD31/SOF. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32/SOF. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33/SOF. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
Industrial Electrical Installations:
AI1/SOF.
Star-delta starter.
AI2/SOF.
Starter through autotransformer.
AI3/SOF.
Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4/SOF.
Starter-inverter.
AI5/SOF.
AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6/SOF. DC motor starter.
AI7/SOF. A u t o m a t i c c h a n g e o f
speed of a Dahlander
motor with change of
direction.
AI8/SOF. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9/SOF. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical c o n t a c t s
inTT neutral regimen.
AI10/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in IT neutral
regimen.
AI12/SOF. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13/SOF. M o d u l a r Tr a i n e r f o r
Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1/SOF. Aerial line model.
AE2/SOF. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3/SOF. Test unit for magneto-thermal
automaticswitches.
AE4/SOF. Test unit for differential
automatic switches.
AE5/SOF. Relay control station.
AE6/SOF. Energy counters control
station.
AE7/SOF. Multi-functional electrical
protection station.
AE8/SOF. Power & torque measurements
of electrical motors.
AE9/SOF. Directional Relay: Earth fault
detection. Directional power
flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 45
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
3
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
4
Connections
points
Data acquisition
software
(MUAD/SOF)
3
4
“n”
Application
Electric power
interface box
(EPIB)
Cable to
computer
(DAB)
Cables to
interface
2
MUAD. Power Data Acquisition System
Data acquisition
board
1
4
Student
post
MUAD is the perfect link between the applications/modules and the PC. MUAD is
a continuous data acquisition system with virtual instrumentation, that measures,
analyzes and represents the parameters involved in the process.
MUAD allows voltage and current acquisition and measurement, data processing,
frequency spectrum and all the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
We easily connect the Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) to the
application/module with the supplied cables (there are several connection points
placed for it). The EPIB is connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board
(DAB), and by using the Data Acquisition with Virtual Instrumentation Software, the
student can get results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the
screen and work with them.
The MUAD system allows voltage and current measurement and acquisition, data processing, frequency spectrum and the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
4.- Electricity
This MUAD System includes EPIB + DAB + MUAD/SOF:
1)Hardware :
1.1) EPIB. Electric power interface box ( dimensions: 300 x 120 x 180 mm. approx.):
Interface that carries out the conditioning of the diverse signals that can be acquired in a process, for
their later treatment and visualisation.
In the front panel, the elements are separated in two parts: left-hand part to VOLTAGE sensors, and
right-hand part corresponds with CURRENT sensors.
Analog Input Channels:
8 analog input channels. Sampling range: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
4 Tension sensors AC/DC, 400V. 4 Current sensors.
1.2) DAB. Data acquisition board :
PCI Data acquisition board (National Instruments) to be placed in a computer slot.
Bus PCI.
Analog input:
Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
Analog output:
Number of channels=2.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Digital Input/Output:
Number channels=24inputs/outputs.
Timing: Counter/timers=2.
EPIB
DAB
2) MUAD/SOF. Data acquisition software :
Data Acquisition Software with Graphic Representation:
Amicable graphical frame.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems.
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different signals.
Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity up to 250 KSPS. (Kilo samples per second) guaranteed.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 46
MUAD/SOF
issue:01/11
MECHANICS. BASIC MODULE (20 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0710/20S
ITEM
1 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIMEBA
BASIC MECHANICS INTEGRATED LABORATORY,
FORMED BY:
1
MECA1
STATICS EXPERIMENTS MODULE
1
2
MECA1/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
STATICS EXPERIMENTS
20
3
MECA1/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
STATICS EXPERIMENTS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
20
4
MECA2
LOAD ELEVATION MECHANISMS MODULE
1
5
MECA2/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF LOAD
ELEVATION MECHANISMS
20
6
MECA2/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR LOAD
ELEVATION MECHANISMS EXPERIMENTS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
7
MECA3
TRANSMISSIONS MODULE
1
8
MECA3/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
TRANSMISSIONS
20
9
MECA3/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
TRANSMISSIONS EXPERIMENTS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
10
MECA4
DINAMICS MODULE
1
11
MECA4/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
DYNAMICS
20
12
MECA4/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
DYNAMICS EXPERIMENTS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
20
13
MECA5
FRICTION MODULE
1
14
MECA5/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
FRICTION
20
15
MECA5/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
FRICTION EXPERIMENTS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
20
16
MECA6
SPECIAL MECHANISMS MODULE
1
17
MECA6/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
SPECIAL MECHANISMS
20
18
MECA6/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
SPECIAL MECHANISMS EXPERIMENTS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20
19
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
20
0710PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
21
0710PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
22
0710IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
23
0710CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
24
0710TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
Ref: 0710/20S
ITEM
25
2 / 2
REFERENCE
0710MANU
DESCRIPTION
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
QTY.
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 20 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
LIMEBA. Basic Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
Laboratory structure
1
2
Modules
Base Panel
2
(support for the elements of the modules)
Modules
(MECA1)
(MECA4)
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
INS/SOF.
(MECA2)
Instructor Software
(MECA5)
+
MECA../SOF.
Student/Module Software
4
LIMEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Teaching
Technique
used
(MECA3)
(MECA6)
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 4 but any part can be supplied individually or additionally to others.
(Base Panel + Module/s is the minimum supply).
Some Available Modules
- MECA1. Statics Experiments.
- MECA4. Dynamics Experiments.
- MECA2. Load Elevation Mechanisms Experiments.
- MECA5. Friction Experiments.
- MECA3. Transmissions Experiments.
- MECA6. Special Mechanisms Experiments.
LIMEBA consists on a complete set of exercises and practical experiments belonging to the area of Applied Mechanics in its two main subareas: Statics (the
analysis of structures in balance) and Dynamics (analysis of the motion of mechanisms). LIMEBA is divided into various experimental modules, each one
presenting a subject of Statics or Dynamics.
Students are expected to build the experiments on the base panel, where distance measurements are possible due to equidistant spacings between holes on the
base panel.
Thanks to the Manuals and the necessary theoretical knowledge imparted by the teacher, students shall be able to do all the measurements.
The MECA series is split up into six parts, named Modules, each of which contains the elements needed for completing a specific group of related exercises and
experiments.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
Page 5
www.edibon.com
7.- Mechanics & Materials
7.1- Basic Mechanics
7.- Mechanics & Materials
7.1- Basic Mechanics
LIMEBA. Basic Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
Base Panel
1
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
It is the supporting structure where the modules’s elements are mounted in order to undertake the experiments and hence, the
base panel is necessary along with any module.
The panel is pierced with equidistant holes that help students to take measurements.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Front Panel in painted steel.
The holes on the base panel are accurately spaced at 25mm centres.
Dimensions (approx.): 950 x 400 x 550 mm. Weight: 15Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
2
Modules
Each module is formed by different experiment components and is packed in a high quality case.
The experimental elements of each module are made out of special anodized aluminium, a high quality material to achieve total precision and to obtain 100% accuracy in
carried out practices.
Manuals include laboratory sheets for every experiment, listing the elements needed in every experiment and giving the correct position of each element on the base panel.
These sheets also give valuable guidance on how to conduct the experiments and recording the results.
There is a particular manual for each Module (8 manuals normally supplied).
MECA1. Statics Experiments
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
All experiment elements are made in
special anodized aluminium.
Centres of gravity of various shaped
plates: rectangle, circle, triangle, T, kite
and irregular.
Drawing panel.
3 Cords and ring. 5 Cords and ring.
Beam balance. Beam.
2 forces equality divided.
The simple pendulum.
Pivot screw. Adjustable hooks.
Set of weights of 0.01N., 0.05 N., 0.1 N.,
0.5 N., 1 N., 2 N., 5 N.
Weight hooks. Light weight hooks.
Pulleys. Screws. Knurled nuts.
Large ext. spring. Small ext. spring.
Dynamometer. Spare rope.
Dimensions (approx.): 500 x 360 x 120
mm. Weight: 5Kg.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en
/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Centres of gravity (Centres of gravity (I) and Centres of gravity (II)):
Specification of the centre of gravity of plates of different shapes using the
simple pendulum and graphical methods.
2.- Triangle of forces. To test that three non-parallel forces in equilibrium
acting in the same plane can be represented by a Triangle of forces.
3.- Parallelogram of forces. When three non-parallel forces in the same plane
are in equilibrium, their lines of action meet at a point, and hence to show
that the resultant of two forces can be found using the Parallelogram of
forces.
4.- Polygon of forces. Verification of the fact that four or more forces in
equilibrium acting on the same point, can be represented by a Polygon of
forces.
5.- Principle of moments. Verification of the principle of moments for parallel
and non parallel forces.
6.- The Pivot or beam balance. To demonstrate that the action of weighing with
a beam balance or slide balance is based upon the principle of moments.
7.- Levers: To determine the mechanical advantage of various types of levers
using the ratio resistance/power (W/P) and to verify that this is the same as
the ratio between distances.
8.- Beam reaction forces. Verification of the fact that a distributed load applied
over a beam may be considered as an equivalent concentrated load
applied at the centre of gravity of the distributed load. Reactions located at
supports due to the load acting on the simply supported beam may be
calculated using the momentum principle, independent of the position of
these beam supports.
MECA2. Load Elevation Mechanisms Experiments
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
All experiment elements are made in
special anodized aluminium.
Three pulley block. Two pulley block.
Wheel and axle set. Weston differential
chain block. Screw jack. Support screw.
Adjustable hooks.
Set of weights of 0.01N., 0.05 N., 0.1 N.,
0.5 N., 1 N., 2 N., 5 N.
Weight hooks. Light weight hook. Pulleys.
Adjustable pulley. Single pulley block.
Knurled nuts. Dynamometer. Spare rope.
Screws.
Dimensions (approx.): 500 x 360 x 120
mm. Weight: 9Kg.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Simple pulleys. Verification of the variation of cable tension in a pulley with
the cable’s direction as it passes over the pulley. To determine the
mechanical advantages of a simple combination of fixed and movable
pulleys.
2.- Pulley blocks. Analysis of the mechanical features of a set of pulley blocks,
which has three sheaves in the upper block and two pulleys in the lower
block.
3.- Single axle and wheel. Determine the law of the Machine for a simple axle
and wheel, and the variation of mechanical advantage and efficiency with
load.
4.- Differential axle and wheel. Determine the law of the Machine for
differential axle and wheel. Verification that the mechanical advantage and
efficiency increases with load up to a limiting maximum.
5.- Weston differential chain blocks. Analysis of the specific characteristics of
these chains.
6.- Screw Jack. To measure the effort required to raise various loads using a
simple form of screw jack and to determine how the mechanical advantage
and efficiency varies with load.
MECA3 Transmissions Experiments
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
All experiment elements are made in
special anodized aluminium.
System of belt drive (includes: flat belt,
round belt and leather strip). Chain drive.
Simple gear train. Bevel gears. Worm
gears. Universal coupling. Support screw.
Adjustable screws.
Set of weights of 0.01N., 0.05 N., 0.1 N.,
0.5 N., 1 N., 2 N., 5 N.
Weight hooks. Light weight hooks. Pulley.
Screws. Knurled nuts. Dynamometers.
Spare rope.
Dimensions (approx.): 500 x 360 x 120
mm. Weight: 7Kg.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
Page 6
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Belt drive (Belt drive (I) and Belt drive (II): Verification of the direction of
rotation of open and crossed belt drives. Verification of the speed of
rotation of the two pulleys is inversely proportional to their diameters. To
measure the difference intension between the two sides of a belt drive and
to determine the efficiency of drive transmission.
2.- Chain drive. Verification of the speed ratio of a chain drive. Measurement
of the efficiency of drive transmission.
3.- The Geared winch (two parallel axles). Comparison of the velocity ratios of
a system of single-stage and double stage geared winch. Specification of
their corresponding mechanical advantages and efficiencies under
varying loads.
4.- Bevel gears (two intersecting axles). Verification of the efficiency velocityratio and mechanical advantages of the Bevel gear unit under different
loads.
5.- Worm gear (two crossed axles). Verification of the speed ratio of a worm
and specification of the transmission efficiency under different loads.
6.- Universal coupling. To investigate the effect of introducing universal
coupling to a simple drive shaft.
(continuation)
LIMEBA. Basic Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
2
Modules
(continuation)
MECA4 Dynamics Experiments
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
All experiment elements are made in
special anodized aluminium.
The spring balance.
Friction with rear.
Friction equipment.
Wheel.
Centrifugal force system.
The simple pendulum.
Adjustable screw.
Set of weights of 0.01N., 0.05 N., 0.1 N.,
0.5 N., 1 N., 2 N., 5 N.
Weight hooks.
Adjustable pulley.
Screws.
Knurled nuts.
Small ext. Spring.
Large ext. Spring.
Dynamometer.
Spare rope.
Dimensions (approx.): 500 x 360 x 120
mm. Weight: 7Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Spring balance. To verify that the extension of a coiled spring is
proportional to the load applied, to show the principle of a spring balance.
2.- Simple pendulum. To show that the time of a simple pendulum depends
only on the length of the pendulum, and to determine the value of the force
of gravity using a simple pendulum.
3.- Kinetic and potential energy. Analysis of some features of kinetic and
potential energy and to show that energy exists, that is may be transformed,
and that it may be “stored” and “given back” .
4.- Inertia. The wheel. To find the energy stores in a wheel by supplying a
known quantity of energy .
5.- Belt-pulley friction. Verification of the fact that the driving force of a
transmission belt increases with the helical angle.
6.- Centrifugal force. Demonstration of the laws of the centrifugal force.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en
/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
MECA5. Friction Experiments
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
All experiment elements are made in
special and anodized aluminium.
Friction equipment.
Friction with roar.
Foils of friction.
Roller.
Block of wheels with roar.
Set of rollers in a marc.
Principle of wedge.
Bearings.
The simple pendulum.
Set of weights of 0.01N., 0.05 N., 0.1 N.,
0.5 N., 1 N., 2 N., 5 N.
Weight hooks.
Light weight hook.
Pulley.
Adjustable pulley.
Single pulley block.
Screws. Knurled nuts.
Dynamometer.
Spare rope.
Dimensions (approx.): 500 x 360 x 120
mm. Weight: 6Kg.
More information in:
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Sliding friction. Verification of the laws of friction and to measure the
coefficient of friction for different materials.
2.- Inclined plane (Inclined plane (I) and Inclined plane (II)) Analysis of the
forces acting on an inclined plane due to a weighted of a roller supported
on the plane. Calculation of the starting force needed for dragging a block
on the plane.
3.- Angle of friction. Measurement of the angle of friction and from it find the
coefficient of friction. To show that the coefficient of friction is equal to
tangent of the angle of friction.
4.- Friction. To show the extent to which friction is reduced by using wheels and
rollers and to compare the effects of different bearing surfaces.
5.- The wedge. Determine mechanical advantage and efficiency obtained
using two different wedges, and to show that overhauling may be
prevented if the angle of inclination of a wedge is small.
6.- Bearings. Comparison of the resistance to turning due to friction of four
bearings made of different materials, and to show something of the
progress made in bearing development.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en
/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
MECA6. Special Mechanisms Experiments
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
All experiment elements are made in
special and anodized aluminium
The cam and roller mechanisms (included
two cams).
Geneva mechanism.
The ratchet mechanisms.
Scotch yoke.
Crank mechanism.
Quick return mechanism.
Adjustable hooks.
Set of weights of 0.01N., 0.05 N., 0.1 N.,
0.5 N., 1 N., 2 N., 5 N.
Weight hooks.
Adjustable pulley.
Screws.
Knurled nuts.
Dynamometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 500 x 360 x 120
mm. Weight: 7Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Cam and roller. To study the difference aspects of cam design.
2.- Geneva motion. Verification of how the circular motion of the drive unit is
transformed into the intermittent motion of the Geneva motion, and of how
this mechanism accelerates and decelerates during the transmission
process.
3.- Ratchet mechanisms. Examination of the parts of the Ratchet assembly
supplied in which a swinging lever is fitted with two pawls.
4.- Scotch yoke. Analysis and verification of the motion of a driving crank and
its relation to the reciprocal element of motion.
5.- Crank mechanism. Analysis of the features of a crank mechanism, drawing
a rotation torque diagram and educing the relation between the crank
rotation and the slide platform movement.
6.- Quick return mechanism. To show a quick return mechanism at work and
to record the relationship between the rotation of the crank and the
movement of the slide.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en
/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
Page 7
www.edibon.com
7.- Mechanics & Materials
7.110 Basic Mechanics
7.- Mechanics & Materials
7.1- Basic Mechanics
LIMEBA. Basic Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
Software
3
Module
(MECA’s elements
mounted on
the Base Panel
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software (MECA../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
information on the subject of study.
+
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
MECA../SOF Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total understanding of
the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the lab exercises and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
- MECA1/SOF.
- MECA2/SOF.
- MECA3/SOF.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
Statics.
- MECA4/SOF.
Load Elevation Mechanisms.
- MECA5/SOF.
Transmissions.
- MECA6/SOF.
Dynamics.
Friction.
Special Mechanisms.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
4
LIMEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
click CAL will perform the calculations.
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It includes a handy option to avoid using different
reference sources while in progress. For example: the
value of Physical constants, their symbols and right
names, conversion factors...
...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
tables.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
Page 8
issue:01/11
DIRTY WATER TREATMENT MODULE
Ref: 1320
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
PDAC
PDAC.Unit
PDAC/CIB
DAB
PDAC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
AEROBIC DIGESTER, COMPUTER CONTROLLED.
FORMED BY:
AEROBIC DIGESTER
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR AEROBIC DIGESTER
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR AEROBIC DIGESTER
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
PDAC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
AEROBIC DIGESTER EQUIPMENT (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
3
PDANC
ANAEROBIC DIGESTER, COMPUTER CONTROLLED.
FORMED BY:
ANAEROBIC DIGESTER
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR ANAEROBIC DIGESTER
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR ANAEROBIC DIGESTER
1
PDANC.Unit
PDANC/CIB
DAB
PDANC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
4
PDANC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ANAEROBIC DIGESTER (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
5
PEFC
FLOCCULATION TEST UNIT, COMPUTER
CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
FLOCCULATION TEST UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR FLOCCULATION TEST
UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR FLOCCULATION TEST
UNIT
1
PEFC.Unit
PEFC/CIB
DAB
PEFC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
6
PEFC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
FLOCCULATION TEST UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
1
7
PEAIC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED AERATION UNIT , FORMED
BY:
AERATION UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR AERATION UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR AERATION UNIT
1
PEAIC.Unit
PEAIC/CIB
DAB
PEAIC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
8
PEAIC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
AERATION UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
9
PPTAC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED WATER TREATMENT PLANT,
FORMED BY:
WATER TREATMENT PLANT.
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR WATER TREATMENT
PLANT.
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR WATER TREATMENT
PLANT.
1
PPTAC.Unit
PPTAC/CIB
DAB
PPTAC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
Ref: 1320
2 / 2
ITEM
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
10
PPTAC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR WATER
TREATMENT PLANT. (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
11
1320PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
12
1320PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
13
1320IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
14
1320CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
15
1320TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
16
1320MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
13.2- Water Treatment
12
(continuation)
PDAC. Computer Controlled Aerobic Digester
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1
Unit: PDAC. Aerobic Digester
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
PDAC Unit:
The aim of this unit is to allow the study and the comprehension of the aerobic digestion processes. Such digestion is
a biological process in which the parcial oxidation of primary mud, active muds or a mixing of different types of mud take
place, through the constant aireation.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 20 litres
reactor vessel with a textile tubular membrane inside. Lid for the reactor with a manual valve and the respective holes.
Sensors: 2 temperature sensors, pH sensor and dissolved oxygen sensor. Thermostatic bath (until 60ºC). Pump for water
circulation of the thermostatic bath. Heating or cooling coil. Peristaltic pump. Water flow meter
(0-0.5 l./min). Air compressor (0-5 l/min). Diffusing sheet for the air inlet. Air flow meter (0-0.5 l/min). Textile membrane,
muds separation. Overflow for the outlet of filtered water. Valve on the bottom for mud extraction.
2 PDAC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time
curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to
avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 PDAC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 800 x 600 x 700 mm. Weight: 50 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/environment/watertreatment/PDAC.pdf
1.- Gas/liquid mass transfer.
2.- Measurement of MLSS and COD
changes as criteria of performance.
3.- Residence time distributions.
4.- Acclimation of biological samples.
5.-. Study of the temperature effect on
the effluent quality.
6.- Study of the detention time effect on
the effluent quality.
7.- Study of the aireation effect on the
effluent quality.
8.-. Study of the pH effect on the effluent
quality.
9. Study of the mass load effect on the
effluent quality.
10. Study of the nutrients effect on the
effluent quality.
11. Study of the recirculation effect on
the effluent quality.
12.- Establishing the stoichiometry of
aerobic processes.
13.- Establishing the kinetics of aerobic
processes.
Other possible practices:
14.- Sensors calibration.
15-33.- Practices with PLC.
PDANC. Computer Controlled Anaerobic Digester
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
3
4
Data
Acquisition
Board
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
Computer
(not included
in the supply)
13. Environment
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1
Unit: PDANC. Anaerobic Digester
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PDANC Unit:
The aim of this unit is to allow the survey and the comprehension of the anaerobic digestion process.
Anaerobic Digestion (AD) is a biological process that happens naturally in which micro-organisms break
down biodegradable material (organic matter) in environments with no oxygen.
Bench-top unit. Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and main metallic elements in stainless steel.
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 2 Packed reactors
(aerobic digesters) that may be operated in series or parallel flow arrangement. Each reactor has 5 litres
capacity. Reactor packing: 25mm diameter Bio-balls. For each reactor: heating jacket with PID Control
from a temperature sensor. 2 Feed peristaltic pumps (50 cc/min). 2 Gas volumetric tanks, for collecting
and measurement of the volume of gas produced. Temperature control. 5 Temperature sensors, type J,
range= -60o C to 200o C.2 pH sensors. 2 Water flow meters (0-50 cc/min). Thermostatic bath, up to 90o
C. Water circulation pump for the thermostatic bath. Buffer vessel (1 litre capacity).
2 PDANC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled.
Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors
involved in the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any
time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control
with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at any moment during the
process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of parameters involved in the
process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the
control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 PDANC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data.
Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the
graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 1000 x 800 x 1000 mm. Weight: 80 Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/environment/
watertreatment/PDANC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 48
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Stabilization process
study.
2.- Effect of temperature in
the purification.
3.- Effect of the effluent pH
in the digestion.
4.- Survey of the feeding rate
in the purification.
5.- Study of the effluent
strength.
6.- Study of the relation
between the nutrient
concentration in the
effluent and purification.
7.- Study of the effect of the
hydraulic charge in the
purification.
8.- Study of the influence of
the inhibitors to the
anaerobic digestion.
9.- Comparison between
mesophilic and
thermophilic anaerobic
digestion.
10.- Determination of the
optimal working
temperature.
11.- Determination of the
optimal feeding rate.
12.- Determination of the
optimal solids/ water
ratio.
13.- Determination of the
optimal degradable/
non-degradable solids
ratio.
14.-Demonstration of the
multistage nature of
anaerobic digestion.
15.-K i n e m a t i c s d e t e r m i
nation.
16.-Carbon balance.
17.- Solids Balance.
18.-Biogas Balance.
19.- Study of the effect of pH.
20.-I n f l u e n t n u t r i e n t
concentration.
21.- Preparation, warming
acclimation of an
anaerobic reactor.
22.- E ffl ue n t t r e a t a b i l i t y
studies, including solids,
carbon and biogas
balances for determining
the purification (CODBOD).
23.- Study of the effects on
purification performance
of:
Feed ratios.
Hydraulic loading.
Temperature.
Influent strength.
Nutrient deficiency.
Other possible practices:
24.- Sensors calibration.
25-43.- Practices with PLC.
13.210 Water Treatment
(continuation)
PEFC. Computer Controlled Flocculation Test Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board - Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
Interface Box
6 Manuals
1
Unit: PEFC. Flocculation Test Unit.
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
PEFC Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Main metallic elements in stainless steel. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution
that the elements in the real unit.
Flocculation test unit illuminated in the base or in back part. Six stirrers with stainless steel paddles. Agitation speed regulation
of 12 to 240 rpm. Six flocculating graduated vessels. Sample volume of each vessel: 1l Timer. Lamp switch. R.p.m. regulator.
R.p.m. display. pH sensor. Conductivity sensor (0-1.99ms). Temperature sensor. Turbidity sensor (0-4000 NTU).
2 PEFC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer
controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors
involved in the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications
from the computer keyboard of the parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing
modifications, at any time and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 PEFC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 1000 x 250 x 520 mm. Weight: 50 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
1.-
Determination of optimum
coagulant dosage.
2.- Study of coagula formation
regarding to the mixing time and the
agitation speed.
3.- Determination of optimum pH.
4.- Coagulation tests in conjunction
with activated carbon.
Other possible practices:
5.- Sensors calibration.
6-24.- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/environment/watertreatment/PEFC.pdf
PEAIC. Computer Controlled Aeration Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
4
Data
EDIBON Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
Cables and Accessories
5
6 Manuals
1
Unit: PEAIC. Aeration Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PEAIC Unit:
This unit permits the study of the oxygen transfer characteristics of diffused air systems, and to study the physical and chemical
parameters which influence their oxygenation capacity.
The “PEAIC” unit demonstrates the water aeration process which, mainly, eliminates smell and taste from water.
Bench top unit. Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and main metallic elements in stainless steel. Diagram in the front
panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Open tank of 28 l. capacity. Air injection pipe. Air injection control. Flow sensor. Paddle stirrer with variable speed control.
Air pump. Oxygen sensor and oxygen probe (300 mm. length). Three diffusers: sparger tube, disk airstone and single
airstone. Temperature sensor.
2 PEAIC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
Control interface box with process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer
controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors
involved in the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications
from the computer keyboard of the PID parameters, at any moment during the process.Open control allowing
modifications, at any time and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. Three safety levels, one mechanical in
the unit, other electronic in control interface and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s (Kilo samples per second). 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 PEAIC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 600 x 700 x 850mm. Weight: 50 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Aeration necessity determination.
2.- To measure the absorption
coefficient KS and the oxygenation
capacity R.
3.- Influence of the injected oxygen
volume.
4.- Study of the effect on KS and R of:
Water temperature.
Degree of fluid mixing.
Gas flow rate.
Diffuser arrangement.
Depth of water.
Water composition.
5.- Influence of the stirrer turn speed.
6.- Aeration with air injection and
agitation.
7.- Influence of the temperature in the
process.
8.- Influence of liquid level in the tank.
9.- Effects of oxygen transfer under nonsteady state conditions.
Other possible practices:
10.- Sensors calibration.
11-29.- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/environment/watertreatment/PEAIC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 49
www.edibon.com
13. Environment
2
Control
Interface Box
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 1320/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
PDAC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR AEROBIC DIGESTER
1
1
2
PLC-PI
PDANC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR ANAEROBIC DIGESTER
1
1
3
PLC-PI
PEFC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR FLOCCULATION TEST
UNIT
1
1
4
PLC-PI
PEAIC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR AERATION UNIT
1
1
5
1320PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
1320PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
1320IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
8
1320CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
1320TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
1320MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
10
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
CLEAR WATER TREATMENT. BASIC MODULE
Ref: 1321
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
EFLPC
EFLPC.Unit
EFLPC/CIB
DAB
EFLPC/CCSOF
2
EFLPC/CAL
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DESCRIPTION
DEEP BED FILTER UNIT, COMPUTER CONTROLLED.
FORMED BY:
DEEP BED FILTER UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR DEEP BED FILTER
UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ADQUISITION + DATA
MANGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR DEEP BED FILTER UNIT
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR DEEP
BED FILTER UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
EMLS
SOLID-LIQUID MIXING EQUIPMENT
1
EMLS/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
LIQUID/SOLID MIXING EQUIPMENT (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
EII
ION EXCHANGE UNIT
1
EII/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR ION
EXCHANGE UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
EEC
CORROSION STUDY UNIT
1
EEC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
CORROSION STUDY UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
1
CAS
SEDIMENT TANSPORT DEMONSTRATION CHANNEL
1
10
CAS/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
SEDIMENT TRANSPORT DEMONSTRATION
CHANNEL (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
11
ESED
SEDIMENTATION STUDY UNIT
1
12
ESED/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING FOR SEDIMENTATION
STUDY UNIT
1
13
BL-6
WATER DEMINERALIZER
1
14
DESMI D
ION EXCHANGE DEMINERALIZER
1
15
1310PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
16
1321PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
17
1321IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
18
1321CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
19
1321TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW - HOW"
1
20
1321MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 1321
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
13.210 Water Treatment
EFLPC. Computer Controlled Deep Bed Filter Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Control
Interface Box
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
5 Cables and Accessories
- Data Management
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1
Unit: EFLPC. Deep Bed Filter Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
EFLPC Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Transparent filtration column of circular section, with removable inferior an superior covers. Support filter of the porous bed.
Filtering bed. Column height: 1300 mm. Valves to establish different circuits and regulate the flows. 30 Pressure sensors.
29 Sample capturing takings. Centrifugal pump, 0.6 kW, 2850 r.p.m.Tank with 2 reservoirs with 350 litres each one (700
litres total capacity); both reservoirs have water height level and system for agitation with help of the water return. Flow sensor.
Mesh filter.
2 EFLPC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer
controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors
involved in the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications
from the computer keyboard of the parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing
modifications, at any time and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface and the third one in the control software.
3
DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4
EFLPC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 2750 x 2400 x 1500 mm. Weight: 250 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Lost of initial load of a porous bed.
2.- Evolution with the time of the lost
load of the bed.
3.- Effectiveness of the filter. Saturation.
4.- Effectiveness of the filtration.
Clarification.
5.- Filter laundry. Fluidification.
6.- Washing and filtering circuits.
7.- The column may be readily adapted
for absorption and ion exchange
studies.
Other possible practices:
8.- Sensors calibration.
9-27.- Practices with PLC.
EII. Ion Exchange Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Self-contained unit either single bed water softening or double bed
system for demineralisation.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with
similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Exchange capacity of the different materials, as resins and used
reagents, as well as the problem water.
Use of simple or double bed for demineralisation.
4 tanks (treated water, demineralized water, hydrochloric acid and
sodium hydroxide).
Pump diaphragm type.
Flow meter 5 l./h,resistant to hydrochloric acid.
2 transparent vertical columns for the anionic and cationic resins,
volume: 0.16l. 1 spare column.
Valves and pipes circuit.
Conductivity meter (with conductivity cell): scale 0.0 to 19.99 µS.,
operating temperature: 0 to 50ºC., Accuracy +/-2%.
Typical commercial anionic and cationic resins.
Switch board.
Manuals: This unit is supplied 8 Manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1200 x 500 x 1000 mm. Weight: 50 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/environment/watertreatment/EII.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 47
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14.15.16.-
Study of general techniques of ion
exchange.
Familiarization with the operation
modes of column ionic exchange.
The exchange capabilities of
different resins materials.
Water softening using a cationic
resin.
Hard water softening (H+ ).
Hard water softening (OH - ).
Resin regeneration efficiency (H+ ).
Demineralisation.
Demineralisation efficiency.
Determination of saline ions
concentration.
Separation of Ni 2+ , Zn2+.
Hard water softening (sodic resin).
Resin regeneration efficiency (Na+ ).
How to operate the conductivity
meter.
Regeneration efficiency of a
softening system.
Desmineralisation using two-bed
exchange.
www.edibon.com
13. Environment
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/environment/watertreatment/EFLPC.pdf
8.3- Fluid Mechanics (Flow Channels)
(continuation)
CAS. Sediment Transport Demonstration Channel
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Some available accessoires:
CFPS. Single bridge pier
CFRM. Level gauge for
measurement of the water height
(hook and point gauges)
CFPR. Adjustable
undershot weir
CFDA. Sand Distributor
CFTP. Pitot tube and
manometer board
CFVDG. Broad and thin crested weirs
CFSDL. Syphon spillway
Dam with
launching pad
CFSDS. Air regulated syphon
Dam with
hard inclination
Dam with
soft inclination
CFPVP. Dams spillway and flow splitters
(3 different models of dams)
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Flow over a mobile sand-bed
Transparent, inclinable flow channel through which
(bedforms associated with increasing flow intensity and
water can be recirculated by a pump over a mobile
sediment transport rate)
bed to demonstrate the whole range of bed forms from
1.- Lower Regime (bedforms exhibed):
- Plane- bed (no motion).
incipient particle movement to bed wash-out.
- Ripples and dunes.
Anodized aluminium structure and supports in painted
- Washed- out dunes.
steel.
-Ripples.
Main metallic elements in stainless steel.
-Dunes.
2.- Upper Regime(bedforms exhibed):
Channel of rectangular section with transparent walls,
- Plane- bed (with motion).
formed by folded methacrylate transparent pieces.
- Chutes and pools.
The channel is assembled on two supports, with a
- Anti- dunes.
- Breaking anti- dunes.
system to control the inclination of the channel.
- Standing waves.
Channel slope: adjustable between 0% and +10%.
Flow over fixed, gravel-bed
Channel section: 80mm, lenght: 2.5 m.
3.- Although the channel can not transport gravel, this can
The unit is self-contained and it can be installed with
be used to investigate flow resistance in gravel and
polder- bed rivers.
easiness, and it has a complete range of profiles.
4.- We can calculate the flow resistance coeficients, using
Inlet tank (capacity: 38 litres), with stilling of flow and
equations such as those of Bray, Limerinos, Hey, Lacey,
with drain valve.
Thompson and Campbell and Bathurst and the results
compared to the actual values obtained by
Pipes.
observation.
Diaphragm flow meter.
Flow structures
Sediment filter in tank and inlet section.
5.- We can examine the structure of turbulence in the flow,
Manometric tubes panel. It is formed by two
using dye injection, interesting for the dune bedform
configuration and clearly demonstrates separation on
methacrylate tubes of 500 mm. of length, with a
the lee face.
graduated panel. Hand pump.
Fixed, smooth bed flow:
The grain diameter of the sediment oscillates among
(the channel may be used without sediment on the bed to
0.1 to 0.3 mm.
demonstrate several flow phenomena and equations)
6.- Rapid, super- critical flow- dominance of intertial over
Accessories included:(not included in the standard
gravity forces, shock waves from flow obstructions.
supply)
7.- Turbulence.
CFRM. Level gauge for measurement of the
8.- Governing equations of open channel flow-Reynold’s
number, Froude number, continuity, Bernoulli,s
water height (hook and point gauges),
equation, weir equations.
to calibrate the overshot weir.
9.- Tranquil, sub-critical flow- movement of surface waves
CFDA. Sand distributor.
upstream against flow.
CFPR. Adjustable undershot weir.
10.- Hydraulic jump- transition from super to sub critical
flow, air entrainment, mixing.
CFPS Single bridge pier.
11.- Flow measurement- using sharp crested weirs.
CFCV. Vertical flat weir.
Bedform hysteresis
The speed of discharge can be selected by means of
12.- If the discharge in the channel changes quickly, there is
the valve that is placed in the Basic Hydraulic Feed
no sufficient time for bedforms to adjust to the new flow
regime. Hence, if a flood hydrograph is simulated by
System (FME00/B).
increasing and then decreasing the discharge,
Basic Hydraulic Feed System (FME00/B):
different depths will occur for the same discharge on
Centrifugal pump: 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at
the rising and falling limbs.
Data collection and numerical evaluation(computational
20.1-12.8m., single-phase 220V. / 50Hz. or
work)
110V. / 60Hz.
13.- In addition to illustrating flow and sediment
Stainless steel impeller.
phenomena, we can use the channel for basic data
Tank capacity:140 litres approx.
collection and numerical evaluation of the following:
- Flow resistance:
Flowmeter.
Manning, Chezy and Darcy-Weisbach fricion
Membrane type flow adjusting valve.
factors for several bedform configuration.
Pump breaker starting.
- Bedform prediction:
Safety differential switch.
Velocity-Hjulstrom diagram.
Suspended load-movement by suspension.
Cables and accessories, for normal operation.
Shields parameter-Bogardi diagram.
Manuals:
Stream power-Simons and Richarson charts.
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Boundary shear stress-Leeder chart.
- Initiation of motion:
Optional accessories: (not included in the standard
Shields diagram.
supply)
Hjulstrom’s curve.
CFTP.
Pitot tube and manometer board.
Mechanics of sediment transport
CFVDG. Broad and thin crested weirs. (One
14.- We can observe the movement of grains, starting from
a plane- bed with no motion, on the following:
broad weir and 2 thin weirs)
- Initiation of motion.
CFCVR. Vertical flat gate and radial gate.
- Trajectory of initial motion.
CFSDL. Syphon spillway.
- Movement by rolling and sliding (contact load).
- Movement by hopping (saltation load).
CFPVP. Dams spillway (3 different models)
- Movement by suspension.
and flow splitters.
Depositionary features and facies
CFCA. Culvert fitting.
15.- We can observe the deposition of sediment load and
CFVC. Crump weir.
the resulting patterns of grains within the sand body
may be identified.
CFVEN. Venturi flume.
Local scour
CFSDS. Air regulated syphon.
16.- Scour under boils and vortices in the flow is observed
CFFS.
False floor sections.
under both the lower and upper regime bedforms.
CFPLR. Artificial roughened bed (3 different
Obstructions may be introduced to represent bridge
piers, sills, revetments, etc, and the resulting pattern of
models).
scour examined.
Dimensions (approx.): 3600 x 1000 x 1700mm.
Other possible practices:
Weight (approx.): 250Kg.
17.- Behaviour study of the connection to the drain of a
channel with sendiment.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ 18.- Turbulence study by means coloration.
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
19.- Calculation of water flow.
fluidmechanicsflowchannels/CAS.pdf
Page 22
EMLS. Liquid/Solid Mixing Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This unit permits the study of the agitation process in order to familiarise the
student with the different magnitudes (torque, turning speed, etc) that take
part in the process.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Brake Dynamo Motor: power: 0.37 kW, revolutions: from 0 to 3000 rpm.
Torque meter: crowbar (load cell): 18.3 cm., force range: 0 -39.2 N.
Carry-agitators: It is the element that allows installing different type of
agitators.
Vertical platform: It allows displacing the brake dynamo motor vertically. A
screw and transfer guide its activation by lineal bearings.
Agitators: shovel, dia.: 100 mm., shovel, dia.: 50 mm., turbine, dia.: 100
mm., turbine, dia.: 50 mm., helix, dia.: 100 mm., helix, dia.: 50 mm.
Tanks: they are cylindrical and of transparent material, with have removable
covers to avoid spills and splashes: 2 tanks of 300 mm dia. and 300 mm
height, one with deflectors and the other without deflectors; 2 tanks of 150
mm dia. and 300 mm height, one with deflectors and the other
without deflectors. The capacity of the tanks is approximately 21 and 5 litres.
The rotation speed of the turbine agitators oscillates between 1000-2500
rpm, and it is possible to obtain 3000 rpm. The propeller agitators are used
for mixing with a viscosity superior to 2000 cp. Speed controller.
Cables and accessories for normal operation.
Manuals: This unit is supplied 8 Manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1940 x 700 x 910 mm. Weight: 95 Kg.
1.- Visualization of fluid fields.
2.- Power required in the agitation
process.
3.- Suspensions of solid in liquids.
4.- Formation of solutions solidsliquids.
5.- Emulsion of unmiscible liquids.
6.- Mixing of miscible liquids.
7.- Heating process of liquid masses.
8.- Test with models at scale.
9.- Quality of mixing / mixing time.
10.-Power speed of the different
impellers.
11.- Demonstration of the different
factors (deposits, deflectors,
agitators...) That affect the mixing,
using visualization techniques and
appropiate measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocess/EMLS.pdf
EEC. Corrosion Study Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The “EEC” unit allows the corrosion simultaneous study of up 8 corrosion
cells, each containing different test specimens.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
8 glass cells. Each one consisting of: a 600 ml. vessel (Pyrex) with a cover.
Such cover has four orifices: two to adapt the test sheets, one for the
reference electrode and another one for the gases diffuser tube.
Number of cells selector. Simultaneous study of corrosion in several cells.
Ag/AgCl reference electrode.
A group of test sheets (electrodes): It consists of 40 x 20 mm. sheets of
variable thickness depending on the material, and on materials such as
stainless steel, carbon steel, zinc, brass, copper, aluminum, graphite, and
iron (nails). Connection cables with 4 mm terminals for the reference
electrode (Ag/AgCl) and the test sheets. Laboratory digital pH-meter. Air
pump for agitation. Air pump switch.
Connection for air pump.
Inert gas inlet. (If the customer wants to work in other kind of atmosphere).
Milliammeter. Millivoltmeter. Milliammeter/ Millivoltmeter selector.
Two rotameters (flow meters): One for the air and another one for the gas.
Flow rate: 1-7.5 l/min. Power supply of direct current (D. C.) with 0-30V and
0-3A output, with intensity and voltage indicator. Control valves for air and
gas flow. Unit main switch. Safety differential switch.
Manuals: This unit is supplied 8 Manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1200 x 300 x500 mm. Weight: 50 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocess/EEC.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.-
Galvanic potentials.
Galvanic pairs study.
Iron passivation.
pH influence.
Aluminium anodization.
Cathodic protection.
Galvanic corrosion + oxidation.
Efect of dissolved oxygen
concentration.
9.- Electrolytic corrosion.
10.- Chemical inhibition.
11.- Prevention of scaling.
12.- Effect of internal stress.
13.- Simultaneous study of corrosion in
several cells.
Other possible practices:
14.- Water treatment studies:
- Calcium carbonate stabilization.
- Oxidation of iron and manganese
in ground waters.
- Water softening by chemical
precipitation.
- Disinfection of waste water with
chlorine solutions.
ESED. Sedimentation Study Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The sedimentation is a process widely used in the classification (by either
equivalence or density), water clarification and wastewater treatment.
“ESED” unit provides a facility for studying the basic physical procesess
involved in sedimentation, which the applications cover fields like chemical
engineering, or concentration, water treatment and other industrial
processes.
Five graduated cylinders of methacrylate (1m x 50 mm approx.) mounted
vertically on a panel, illuminated from behind, and with the possibility of
being removable for cleaning.
Stopwatch.
Screen with two fluorescent tubes.
Three beakers.
Specific gravity bottle.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 550 x 400 x 1300 mm. Weight: 35 Kg.
1.- Variation of the sedimentation
characteristics with the
concentration a n d s u s p e n s i o n
height.
2.- Effect of initial concentration on
sedimentation characteristics.
3.- E f f e c t o f i n i t i a l h e i g h t o n
sedimentation characteristics.
4.- Construction of the rate of settling
curver against concentration
form a single batch test.
5.- Effect of particle size distribution.
7.- Identification of the different
sedimentation regimens.
8.- Use of flocculating additives.
9.- Construction of settling rate curves.
10.- Visualization of the retarded
sedimentation.
11.- Study of the differences between a
clarified and classifier.
12.- Study and visualization of the
differential sedimentation.
13.- Study of the methods of sinking and
floating.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocess/ESED.pdf
QMS. Solids Handling Study Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This unit is designed to introduce students in different aspects of solids
behaviour, unit operations such as size reduction, mixing, transport,
discharge, weighting, etc.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Ball mill with various sizes of balls.
Motor for the ball mill.
Vibratory shaker and a set of eight sieves with several hole mesh from 2 mm
to 0.063 mm.
V-Blender.
Motor for the V-Blender.
Blowing and ejector.
Compressor.
Cyclone and pneumatic conveyor. Rotary cylinder.
Hoppers with different sizes of exit orifices. Collecting tray.
Balance. Graduated test tube.
Manuals: This unit is supplied 8 Manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1020x840x1680 mm. Weight: 200 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/chemicalengineering/chemicalprocess/QMS.pdf
Page 19
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Sieving techniques.
2.- To determine the angle of repose.
3.- To determine bulk solids parameters
of density.
4.- Hopper discharge. To use the
hopper to measure solids discharge
rates and relate to initial load and
hoper exit orifice size.
5.- Cyclone operation.
6.- Pneumatic conveying.
7.- Observe the comminution of
granular solids processed through a
ball mill.
8.- Study of solids mixing.
9.- Study of the solids properties.
10.- Solids weighing: Balance.
Other possible practices:
11.- Mixer operation.
12.- Siever operation.
www.edibon.com
11.Chemical Engineering
11.410 Chemical Process
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 1321/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
EFLPC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR DEEP BED FILTER
UNIT
1
1
2
1321PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
1321PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
1321IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
5
1321CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
1321TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW - HOW"
1
7
1321MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply: